JP7302415B2 - gaming system - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game system using a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that is installed in a game hall (for example, a game hall) and performs a game by using a game medium (for example, a ball), and a game machine that a player plays There is a game system provided with a management device (for example, a hall computer) that individually accumulates and manages game results (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-138711 A

However, in the gaming system described above, it is necessary to suppress cheating by players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system capable of suppressing fraudulent behavior by players.

In order to achieve this object, the game system according to claim 1 is installed in a game hall, and includes at least two game machines which are pre-registered and capable of executing a game by a player using a predetermined game medium. a member information storage means for storing member information for individually identifying a player, and a game value information such as a game value given based on a game played on the gaming machine; a management device having individual game value storage means for storing in association with the member information stored in the means; a photographing means for photographing an image of the game machine; terminal means configured to be communicable with a management device, wherein the management device is capable of outputting game machine video of the game machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means. output means, wherein the terminal means outputs display means capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means, and external execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game to the management device; and an external execution information output means for outputting the external execution information, wherein the management device outputs the individual information corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means when the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means. execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game based on the game value information stored in the game value storage means, wherein the game machine outputs the execution information a game execution means for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the means, wherein in the game hall, a predetermined first member stored in the member information storage means; When a game is being played in a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the information, the terminal means corresponds to the first member information. Terminal-side multiple game regulation means for regulating the execution of games in a second game machine different from the first game machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means.

According to the game system of claim 1, at least two or more game machines are installed in the game arcade and are capable of executing a game by a player using a predetermined game medium. member information storage means for storing member information for individually identifying the gaming machine; A management device having individual game value storage means for storing in association with the member information; a photographing means for photographing an image of the game machine; wherein the management device comprises image output means capable of outputting the game machine image of the game machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means The terminal means includes display means capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means, and external execution information outputting for outputting external execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game to the management device. means, wherein when the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, the management device stores the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means; execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information for causing the gaming machine to execute a game based on the stored game value information, wherein the gaming machine outputs the game execution from the execution information output means. a game execution means for executing a game using the game medium when information is output, wherein the game machine corresponds to predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means in the game arcade; said individual game value storage means corresponding to said first member information in said terminal means when a game is played in a predetermined first gaming machine based on said game value information stored in said individual game value storage means; a terminal-side multiple game regulation means for regulating the execution of a game in a second game machine different from the first game machine based on the game value information stored in the game machine. As a result, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 4 is a front view of an authentication card that can be inserted into a card insertion hole of the decryption device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of distribution of pachinko machines and authentication cards between gaming machine manufacturers and gaming halls; 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a counter buffer, a first reserved ball storage area, a second reserved ball storage area, a reserved ball execution area, a normal figure reserved ball storage area, and a general figure reserved ball execution area. . It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot random number table typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special-figure 1 jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special-figure 2 jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of a reservation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is , and a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special prize opening opening/closing table; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a change pattern table for losing; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special prize opening opening table; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an encryption device and a decryption device; FIG. The control command output from the main controller is encrypted by the encryption device, decrypted by the decryption device via the sub-controller, and delivered to the sound lamp control device or the payout control device. It is a figure for explaining. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the encryption device; 4 is a flow chart showing encryption multiplexing processing executed by an MPU in the encryption device; Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is a flowchart which shows the variation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the decoding device; 4 is a flow chart showing the separation and decoding process performed by the MPU in the decoding device; The flow of pachinko machines and authentication cards between the game machine manufacturer and the game hall in the second embodiment, and the hall computer of the game hall and each user's terminal device are configured to be connectable via the Internet. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating a thing. It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the hall computer of the game hall in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the member information storage part in 2nd Embodiment, and the game execution data storage part. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine and a hall computer in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows transfer of information of a pachinko machine, a video camera, a hall computer, and a user's terminal device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the top screen which shows a virtual hole displayed on the monitor of a user's terminal device in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a game execution screen in a virtual hall displayed on the monitor of the user's terminal device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the hall computer in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing account processing executed by an MPU in a hall computer in the second embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing model selection processing executed by an MPU in a hall computer in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing game execution processing executed by an MPU in a hall computer in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game end processing executed by the MPU in the hall computer in the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing prize exchange processing executed by the MPU in the hall computer in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission/reception process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. The flow of the pachinko machine and the authentication card between the game machine manufacturer and the game hall in the third embodiment, and the fact that the hall computer of the game hall and the user's terminal device are configured to be connectable via the Internet will be explained. It is a schematic diagram for. It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the hall computer of the game hall in the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the member information storage part in 3rd Embodiment, and the game execution data storage part. It is a figure which shows transfer of information of a pachinko machine, a video camera, a hall computer, and a user's terminal device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the exchange of information between the gaming machine manufacturer's data server, the hall computer, and the user's terminal device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing account processing executed by an MPU in a hall computer in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission/reception process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the membership card game process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the member information storage part in 4th Embodiment, and the game execution data storage part. It is a figure which shows transfer of information of a pachinko machine, a video camera, a hall computer, and a user's terminal device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing account processing executed by an MPU in a hall computer in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing game execution processing executed by an MPU in a hall computer in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the membership card game process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. The flow of the pachinko machine and authentication card between the game machine manufacturer and the game hall in the fifth embodiment, and the fact that the hall computer of the game hall and the user's terminal device are configured to be connectable via the Internet will be explained. It is a schematic diagram for. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the transmission and reception of information among a game machine maker's data server, a pachinko machine, a video camera, a hall computer, and a user's terminal device in the fifth embodiment.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 35, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 5 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 5) having a large number of nails and prize-winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64a, 64b, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is displayed, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) described later, or when an interval time occurs during the jackpot game. This button is pressed by the player during the "character selection" effect. In addition, the frame button 22 corresponds to the first special symbol used in the first lottery game, or the third symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as the third symbol) corresponding to the second special symbol used in the second lottery game is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the effect in the advance notice display executed in the variable display of (1).

The first lottery game is a lottery game caused by a ball entering a first starting port 64a (see FIG. 5) (hereinafter, the ball entering may be referred to as "winning"). be. In addition, the second lottery game is a lottery game caused by winning a prize to a second start port 64b (see FIG. 5) described later (hereinafter, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are collectively referred to as simply Sometimes referred to as a “lottery game”).

Also, the variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later. For example, the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b described later (see FIG. 5) is executed as a trigger, and after the pattern (third pattern described later) is changed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed. The result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the winning prize is presented to the player according to the combination of the symbols. In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be able to execute only one lottery game, and the first special symbol based on the first lottery game and the second special symbol based on the second lottery game. Based on the first lottery game using the third pattern in common with the pattern (hereinafter, the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be collectively referred to as "special pattern" in some cases) It is configured to display either the lottery result or the lottery result based on the second lottery game.

Furthermore, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) to be described later are unified. Stage” and “Island Stage” are provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "ready-to-win display" means a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly divided into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"), Developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element with a higher expected jackpot than the "normal reach" variable element, and similarly "normal reach" variable element Developed and executed, A variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than a variable element of "super reach" is prepared.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the variable effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the variable element of "high-speed change" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed in the variable effect so that the player cannot see it. This is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 . Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Also, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) to be described later, the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or When it develops into the variable element of "special reach", the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". It may be configured as

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach". , according to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" are executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined.

In addition, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper tray 17 or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower tray 50 to be described later.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5). ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is continuously shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the player, and thus the ball is driven to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Specifically, when the player continues to operate the operation handle 51 while the balls are stored in the upper tray 17, 100 balls are fired per minute (one at an interval of 0.6 seconds). configured to be fired. When the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stopping switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), a display control board (display control device 114), an encryption control board (encryption device 300), and a decoding A control board (decoding device 400) is mounted to form a unit. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board (device) has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, ports for communication with various devices, various A random number generator used for lottery, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are respectively They are housed in substrate boxes 100-106. Each of the board boxes 100 to 106 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

Even if the box base and box cover of the board box 105 (encryption device 300) and board box 106 (decryption device 400) are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (or sealing seal), good. By checking the sealing units (or sealing seals) of the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, it is possible to know whether the board boxes 105 and 106 have been opened. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a modification or the like has been performed by a third party.

The encryption device 300 is electrically connected to the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111, respectively, and the sound lamp control device 113 or the payout control device 111 output from the main control device 110 A device for generating multiplexed commands by encrypting and multiplexing each control command. is placed between

The decoding device 400 is electrically connected to the voice ramp control device 113 and the payout control device 111, respectively, and separates the multiplexed command transmitted from the voice ramp control device 113 or the payout control device 111, and decodes the separated multiplex command. It is a device for decoding the encoded command and returning it to each control command. Like the encryption device 300 , the decryption device 400 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5 ) between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 .

This decryption device 400 is provided with a card insertion hole 410 into which an authentication card 500 (see FIG. 4) issued by the gaming machine maker A (see FIG. 4) can be inserted. Then, by inserting a valid authentication card 500 (see FIG. 4) into the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to play a normal game. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when an unauthorized authentication card is inserted into the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400, or when the authentication card 500 is not inserted into the card insertion hole 410 is configured such that normal games cannot be executed in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

The back side of the pachinko machine 10 is covered with the back pack 92, and the card insertion hole 410 is closed when the back pack 92 is closed (the game board 13 is attached to the inner frame 12). 410 authentication card 500 is configured to be non-insertable. With this configuration, only the administrator (important member) of the game hall who can lock the pachinko machine 10 can insert the authentication card 500 into the card insertion hole 410, thereby preventing an unauthorized authentication card. etc. can be suppressed.

3 and 4, details of the authentication card 500, and the authentication card 500 when the pachinko machine 10 is sold and resold from the game machine maker A to the game hall B or the game hall C I will explain how to handle . FIG. 3 is a front view of the authentication card 500 that can be inserted into the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of circulation of the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 between the gaming machine maker A and the gaming halls B and C. As shown in FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 3, the authentication card 500 includes at least an IC chip 501 , an information display section 502 and a QR code (registered trademark) display section 503 .

The IC chip 501 is manufactured to store at least a serial number (Serial Number, hereinafter, "SN" may be added to the serial number, see FIG. 18) individually assigned to each pachinko machine 10. A number storage unit 501a (see FIG. 17) and a master key (Master Key) that is also given to each pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the master key may be denoted by "Km" (see FIG. 18). ) and expiration date information (Expiration Date) of the master key stored in the master key storage unit 501b (see FIG. 17). (see FIG. 18) is provided. It should be noted that the master key may not be uniquely provided for each pachinko machine 10, but may be shared for each game machine manufacturer, for example.

The serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 501a (see FIG. 17), the master key Km stored in the master key storage unit 501b (see FIG. 17), and the expiration date stored in the expiration date information storage unit 501c The information ED (both see FIG. 18) is generated (obtained) when the corresponding pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, and is registered in the data server 510 of the gaming machine maker A, respectively. Then, the generated serial number SN is written (stored) in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500 issued when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (or sold). It is written in the manufacturing number storage unit 501a. In addition, the generated master key Km is written (stored) in the master key storage unit 302b (see FIG. 17) of the encryption device 300 of the pachinko machine 10, and an authentication card issued at the same time as the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. 500 is written in the master key storage unit 501b in the IC chip 501 of the 500. Furthermore, the generated expiration date information ED is written in the expiration date information storage section 501c in the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500 issued when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. The validity period information ED stored in the validity period information storage unit 501c is configured so that the date and time can be confirmed by a real time clock (so-called RTC function) installed in the decoding device 400. , when the date and time of the expiration date information ED is reached, the validity of the expiration date information ED is lost.

The expiration date information ED stored in the expiration date information storage unit 501c is configured to be changeable (updatable) by the data server 510, while the serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 501a and the master key The master key Km stored in the storage unit 501b cannot be changed (updated). Therefore, when one pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, (one) authentication card 500 unique to the one pachinko machine 10 is generated.

The IC chip 501 is configured to be readable (readable) while inserted into the card insertion hole 410 by a card reader 411 (see FIG. 17) of the decoding device 400, which will be described later. Serial number SN, master key Km, and expiration date information ED read by card reader 411 (see FIG. 18) are processed by MPU 401 (see FIG. It is used to successfully decode multiplexed commands sent from 111.

The information display unit 502 displays the model name information indicating the model name (model name) of the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the authentication card 500, and the serial number obtained by digitizing the serial number SN (see FIG. 18) stored in the IC chip 501. information is indicated for each. Further, the board box 100 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 also has the model name (model name) and serial number information. For this reason, the manager (employee) of the gaming hall B confirms the model name information and the serial number information written on the information display portion 502 of the authentication card 500, and determines the model to which the authentication card 500 should be inserted. and the serial number of the pachinko machine 10 can be recognized.

A QR code (registered trademark) display portion 503 displays a QR code (registered trademark) in which the model name information and the serial number information displayed in the information display portion 502 are encoded. Also, the same QR code (registered trademark) as the QR code (registered trademark) display unit 503 is written (attached) on the board box 100 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and a predetermined QR code ( The QR code (registered trademark) of the QR code (registered trademark) display portion 503 of the authentication card 500 and the QR code (registered trademark) of the main controller 110 are read by a registered trademark reading device (not shown) and matched. By discriminating whether or not to play, it is possible to discriminate whether or not the combination of the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 is a normal combination.

Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machines 10a and 10b manufactured by the game machine maker A are given a unique manufacturing number SN (see FIG. 18) generated by the data server 510, and the pachinko machine 10a , 10b and the same (corresponding) serial numbers SN are stored (written) in the IC chips 501 of the authentication cards 500a and 500b. Specifically, for example, the first serial number SN1 generated (assigned) to the pachinko machine 10a is stored in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10a, and the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500a is manufactured. It is also stored in the number storage unit 501a (see FIG. 17). The second serial number SN2 generated (given) to the pachinko machine 10b is set to a value different from the first serial number SN1 given to the pachinko machine 10a, and the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10b , and is also stored in the serial number storage section 501a (see FIG. 17) of the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500b.

For example, when the pachinko machines 10a and 10b are sold to the game hall B from the game machine maker A, the pachinko machines 10a and 10b installed in the game hall B correspond to the pachinko machines 10a and 10b. By inserting the authentication cards 500a and 500b, the pachinko machines 10a and 10b in the game hall B can be operated normally.

Conventionally, when a game machine such as a pachinko machine 10 manufactured by a game machine maker is transported to a game hall, a board that affects the ball payout rate of the main controller 110 or the payout control device 111, etc. by a carrier or the like becomes an illegal board. There are cases where fraudulent acts that result in being replaced are performed. Even after installation in the game hall, fraudulent acts such as exchanging for illegal boards by malicious players, or fraudulent acts such as exchanging for illegal boards by malicious game halls may occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the control command transmitted from the main controller 110 is encrypted, and the regular (corresponding) authentication card 500 issued by the gaming machine manufacturer A that manufactured the pachinko machine 10 is decrypted. When not inserted into the decryption device 400, the encrypted control command cannot be decrypted normally, and sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 are controlled normally. It is configured such that normal games (payout operation, variable performance, etc.) are not performed by making it impossible to perform control based on commands. By configuring in this way, when the main control device 110 is replaced with an illegal board, or the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113 is replaced with an illegal board, a normal game can be played in the pachinko machine 10. can be suppressed, unintended addition of game values and execution of games based on fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, the authentication card 500 is configured to be able to set an expiration date. Depending on whether or not, it is possible to set whether or not decryption by the master key Km (see FIG. 18) stored in the master key storage unit 501b (see FIG. 17) is possible. By structuring that the expiration date information ED can be updated by the data server 510 of the game machine maker A, when the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall B is set beyond the expiration date, the pachinko machine 10 By disabling execution of normal operations in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the execution of games on the pachinko machine 10 beyond the installation time limit and ensure legal compliance.

Further, for example, the authentication card 500b1 is lent by the game machine maker A to the game hall B when the pachinko machine 10b is sold, and the pachinko machine 10b is resold (sold) as a used machine to another game hall C, for example. In this case, the authentication card 500b1 is temporarily returned to the gaming machine maker A, and the registration data of the authentication card 500b1 is temporarily canceled. Then, by updating (extending) the expiration date information ED (see FIG. 18) of the returned authentication card 500b1, etc., the authentication card 500b2 is reissued in a state that it can be used in the resold pachinko machine 10b, and the pachinko machine is played. The machine 10b is lent to the game hall C, which is the buyer (reseller) of the machine 10b. The authentication card 500 that is not returned to the gaming machine maker A at the time of resale may be configured to lose its validity, and a large fine is imposed on the gaming hall B for rent violation. It may be configured as Alternatively, a person in charge (for example, a salesperson) of the gaming machine manufacturer may randomly check whether the authentication card 500 is genuine.

By using the authentication cards 500b1 and 500b2 in this way, if a pachinko machine 10b installed in the game hall C is tampered with, a normal game cannot be played at the pachinko machine 10b. can do. Therefore, if there is unauthorized modification during transportation for resale from game hall B to game hall C, or if the main controller 110 or the like is modified or modified by a malicious third party at game hall C , the pachinko machine 10b can be prevented from operating normally, and unintended giving of game values and execution of games based on fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 10b can be suppressed. In addition, since the pachinko machine maker A can grasp the distribution form of the pachinko machine 10b as a second-hand machine, maintenance and after-sales follow-up of the pachinko machine 10b, as well as sales activities as a new business destination can be facilitated. can.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 5, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 made of transparent resin which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. It has a general prize winning port 63 capable of obtaining a predetermined prize ball by winning, a first starting port 64a for a first lottery game, a second starting port 64b for a second lottery game, and an ordinary electric player 64c. It has a starting port unit 64, a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit occurs in the first lottery game or the second lottery game, a through gate 67 for driving lottery of the ordinary electric part 64c, and a third pattern display device 81. The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 .

The general winning port 63, the starting port unit 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and can be viewed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 5) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the central part (hereinafter, the act of shooting the ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as "right hitting". , the act of causing the shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as “left hitting”). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, a ball can enter the first start hole 64a and the second start hole 64b, but the variable winning device 65 is difficult to enter. Also, in a right-handed game, the ball passes through the variable winning device 65 and the through gate 67, and the normal electric 64c is opened to allow the ball to enter the second starting port 64b. It is configured such that a ball is difficult (impossible) to enter the first starting port 64a.

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is arranged in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part in FIG. 5). It is The special symbol display device 37 performs variable display of each special symbol (hereinafter, variable display of the special symbol is referred to as "dynamic display") according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later. At the same time, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display has not been performed, among the balls that have won (entered) a first start port 64a or a second start port 64b, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. Also, the number of rounds of the jackpot and error display are indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors indicates various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, the "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from opening to closing of the variable winning device 65, which will be described later, to divide the number of prize balls in the jackpot. One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the start of the opening of the winning device 65, or when 10 balls win in the variable winning device 65 while the variable winning device 65 is open. is configured as

The special LED group 37b consists of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 consisting of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 likewise consisting of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as "special figure 1") that indicates the determination result of the first lottery game. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 variably displays a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as "special figure 2") that indicates the determination result of the second lottery game.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a variable display (the first In one embodiment, the LEDs on the right side of the upper LED group 37b1 are sequentially lit one by one from the leftmost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed. Any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the LEDs.

Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, variable display (first embodiment Then, the LEDs on the right side of the lower LED group 37b2 are sequentially lit one by one from the leftmost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed. Any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is stopped and displayed depending on the combination of each lighting pattern.

In any LED group, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big win, each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the big win. be done. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is a big win is determined (big win lottery), and if it is determined to be a big win, a prize is won. Judgment of the jackpot type is also performed according to the starting ports 64a and 64b.

As the jackpot type determined here, based on the winning to the first start port 64a, "10 rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as "R") probability variable jackpot" corresponding to "variable probability A”, “variable probability B” corresponding to “4R variable probability jackpot”, and “time saving B” corresponding to “4R time saving jackpot” are prepared (see FIG. 11(a)). In addition, based on the winning of the second starting port 64b, "probability variable A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot" and "time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" are prepared (Fig. 11 ( b) see).

A “10R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “variable probability state” after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. Also, the "4R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "variable probability state" after the jackpot of four rounds. Furthermore, the “10R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “time reduction state” after the jackpot of 10 rounds. In addition, the "4R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot of four rounds.

Here, the ``normal game state'' refers to a low probability state that is not a ``probability fluctuation state'' or a ``time shortening state'', and refers to a state where the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol winning probability are normal. . That is, in the "normal game state", the probability of winning the special symbols is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the probability of winning the normal symbols is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Therefore, the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b may be referred to as "winning assist state"), but the player This is the most unfavorable playing state for

Next, "time reduction state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is low probability like the "normal game state", but the so-called "time reduction function" in which the probability of winning normal symbols is increased is given. say. That is, in the "shortened time state", a normal electric motor 64c provided in the starting port unit 64, which will be described later, is likely to be in an open state. This is the easy game state, that is, the winning assist state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)) after the jackpot, for each jackpot This is maintained until the special symbol variation effect is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in the first embodiment). After the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the game is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, "probability change state" refers to a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of subsequent special symbols is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot. That is, the "probability change state" refers to the time during the so-called probability change, in other words, the state of the game that easily shifts to the special game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the jackpot type "probability variable A" or "probability variable B" (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)), a jackpot occurs again in the special symbol variation effect. Until (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "next jackpot"), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, the said "time saving function" is provided as a "probability change state." That is, in the "probability fluctuation state", until the next big win, the probability of the special symbol jackpot is high, and the normal electric 64c, which will be described later, is likely to be in an open state. A winning assistance state is entered in which the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As a stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is 1 type of display pattern corresponding to losing, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability A", and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability B". There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to , and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern corresponding to each jackpot other than the display pattern corresponding to the loss does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, while the stop display of losing can be recognized, any of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", or "time saving B" It is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a stop display.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", and the jackpot type "time saving". 31 types of display patterns are provided for the display patterns corresponding to "A". And each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type similarly to the upper LED group 37b1, and is previously associated with a random display pattern. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, while being able to recognize the stop display of losing, it is possible to recognize which stop display of the jackpot type "probability variable A" or "time saving A". Configured to be difficult to identify.

By configuring in this way, even when each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped, Since it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of the winning jackpot, a game property is created that makes the player guess which jackpot has occurred, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality (3) of general winning holes 63 from which 5 to 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

The plurality of general prize winning openings 63 are arranged one each in the upper part, the middle part or the lower part of one general prize winning opening unit. A plurality of nails as flow direction changing means capable of colliding with a ball to change the flow direction of the ball are planted in the upper part of the entrance of each general winning port 63, respectively. Only when a ball that does not win a prize-winning opening such as the starting opening 64b passes through the nail-to-nail channel between a plurality of nails planted in the upper part of each general prize-winning opening 63, is entered into each general prize-winning opening 63. Balls that are allowed to flow in but do not pass through the inter-nail passages between the nails, i.e., balls that are repelled by the nails into passages other than the inter-nail passages are prevented from flowing into the general winning opening 63. is configured to Balls that did not enter the upper general prize-winning port 63 are placed in the middle or lower general prize-winning ports 63, and balls that did not enter the upper and middle general prize-winning ports 63 are placed in the lower portion. It is constructed in such an arrangement as to be able to win a prize in the general prize-winning port 63 of .

Balls that have entered each general prize winning port 63 pass through a confluence section where the guide passages provided on the back side of the general prize winning port unit merge, and flow down a collecting passage provided on the downstream side of the confluence portion. It is configured to be detectable by one general prize winning port switch (not shown) disposed (buried) in the collective passage. Each general prize winning port 63 is configured to give (pay out) an equivalent value (prize ball) to one winning ball, so the balls winning from each general prize winning port 63 are aggregated. There is no problem even if the ball is detected by the general winning opening switch from 1 to 1. As a result, the parts cost can be reduced as compared with the case where a general prize winning port switch is provided for each guide passage.

It should be noted that the balls detected by the general winning slot switches (not shown), like the balls detected by the respective winning slot switches (not shown), etc. , and is configured to be detected by an out switch (not shown). In addition, if the ball is not detected by the out switch within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the general winning hole switch, it is assumed that the balls are clogged in the gathering plate. It may be configured to perform a predetermined anomaly notification.

At the lower center of the game area, a starting opening unit 64 is provided in which a first starting opening 64a, a second starting opening 64b, and a normal electric opening 64c into which balls flowing down the playing area can enter are integrated. . This starting port unit 64 mainly includes a first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter, a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter by opening a normal electric terminal 64c, and the second starting port 64b. and an ordinary electric wire 64c capable of preventing a ball from entering the starting port 64b.

When the ball enters the first start port 64a provided in the start port unit 64, the first start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first start port switch is turned on. Due to this, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) performs a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol (that is, the first lottery game). Then, the dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. is executed. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the prize winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

The balls detected by the first starter switch (not shown), like the balls detected by the prize winning switches (not shown), etc. (not shown) into one out passage (not shown) and detected by an out switch (not shown). Also, if the ball is not detected by the out switch within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the first start port switch, it is assumed that the ball clogging or the like has occurred in the gathering plate. , may be configured to perform a predetermined anomaly notification.

Below the first starting port 64a, there is provided a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric motor 64c is in an open state. When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main function described later is caused by turning on the second starting port switch. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed in the control device 110 (see FIG. 7). Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. A performance is performed. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the prize winning holes from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

The balls detected by the second starter switch (not shown), like the balls detected by the prize winning switches (not shown), etc. (not shown) into one out passage (not shown) and detected by an out switch (not shown). Also, if the ball is not detected by the out switch within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the second start port switch, it is assumed that the ball clogging or the like has occurred in the gathering plate. , may be configured to perform a predetermined anomaly notification.

As described above, above the second starting port 64b in a front view, the second starting port 64b is opened and closed by opening and closing the two blade members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. A common electric actuator 64c is provided that can be displaced to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). The normal electric terminal 64c is normally in a closed state in which the blades are closed (the blades are erected upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or is difficult to enter. there is

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the normal electric function 64c is operated for a predetermined time. From the state in which the blades of the normal electrode 64c stand up while the normal electrode 64c is being operated. It will be in a substantially V-shaped (inverted V-shaped) movable state, and the second starting port 64b will be in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, it stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and when the second start port 64b is in an open state, the ball enters the second start port 64b. It is possible to make a state in which many jackpot lotteries can be performed.

A variable winning device 65 having a horizontally long rectangular first opening/closing plate 65a is provided on the right side of the starting port unit 64 when viewed from the front.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is not won in the normal state (for example, in the "normal game state"), the inflow of balls into the variable winning device 65 is controlled by raising the first opening/closing plate 65a. By holding it, the flowing direction of the ball about to flow into the variable winning device 65 is changed by colliding with the front surface (closed surface) of the first opening/closing plate 65a, so that the ball does not enter the variable winning device 65. is configured as On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) results in a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, special The special LED group 37b of the symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the first opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened according to the type (type) of the generated jackpot, and the ball flowing down the game area collides with the rear surface (open surface) of the first opening/closing plate 65a. The game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win a prize in the variable prize winning device 65. In this special game state, the first opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses, or until 10 balls are won).

The opened first opening/closing plate 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined number of balls are won, and after the closing is maintained for a specific period, the first opening/closing plate 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. time is open. The opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing plate 65a can be repeated, for example, 10 times (10 rounds) in total. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player receives a larger amount than usual as a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

The ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is configured to be discharged from the back side of the game board 13 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, balls detected by a large winning slot switch (not shown), which will be described later, are collected on a collecting board ( (not shown) into one out passage (not shown) and detected by an out switch (not shown). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the ball is not detected by the out switch within a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch, the variable winning device 65 It is configured to perform a predetermined anomaly notification on the assumption that ball clogging or the like has occurred in (collecting plate).

A through gate 67 is provided above the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front and on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 described later when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 performs a normal symbol winning lottery due to the turn-on. This through gate 67 is only used as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is constructed so that prize balls or the like are not paid out even when a ball passes through.

As described above, the starting port unit 64 is provided with the normal electric terminal 64c. The ordinary electric member 64c is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that drives the rotating plate to open and close.

Normally, the main controller 110 of the first embodiment maintains the rotating plate of the normal electric part 64c in an upright state, and covers both the left and right sides of the second starting port 64b, thereby allowing the second starting port 64b to move. It prevents the inflow of balls. When a win is won in the variable display of normal symbols, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the normal electric member 64c is erected for the predetermined time. From the state, it is driven to an open state (tilted state) tilted to the right by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees), so that the ball can flow into the second start port 64b and flow down near the start port unit 64. It is configured to be in a state in which the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b, that is, in a winning assist state.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a win in the variable display of normal symbols changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and by making it difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal electric role 64c The rotating plate is made difficult to be in an open state (inclining state) so as to make it difficult to enter the second starting port 64b. On the other hand, in the "time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state", the winning probability of normal symbols is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and by making it easier to win in the variable display of normal symbols, normal telephone The rotation plate of the combination 64c is made easy to be in an open state (tilted state), and it is configured so that the player can easily enter the second starting port 64b.

Instead of changing the winning probability of normal symbols from the "normal game state" as in the "time reduction state" or the "probability fluctuation state", the number of times of the normal electric role 64c is changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to change the time during which the moving plate rotates, or the number of times the rotating plate of the ordinary electric member 64c rotates. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric player 64c is set longer than in the "normal game state", or the normal electric The number of rotations of the rotating plate of the winning combination 64c may be increased compared to the "normal game state". In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the winning probability of normal symbols is increased, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric hand 64c is increased, and the rotating plate of the normal electric hand 64c is increased. and at least two of the number of times of rotation may be performed simultaneously.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged from the central portion of the game area to the right side area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, the variation of the third symbol A normal pattern composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs effects, and an LED that variably displays the normal pattern with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. A display device 83 is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later. are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is controlled by the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special pattern display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special pattern display device 37 is performed using the third pattern of the third pattern display device 81. It is. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 6(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.6(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. almost all over the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is constructed so that a jackpot is generated after the variable performance is completed. When winning the jackpot type of "probability variation A", a variable performance is performed in which the main symbols with the number "7" are aligned. Also, if you win the jackpot type of "variable B", the main pattern with an odd number other than the number "7", that is, the number "1", "3", "5" or "9" A variable effect is performed in which the attached main patterns are aligned. On the other hand, if you win the jackpot type of “time saving A” or “time saving B”, the main pattern with even numbers, that is, the numbers “2”, “4”, “6” or “8” are attached. A variable effect is performed in which the main symbols are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three vertically, with the lower two-thirds being the main display area Dm for varying the third symbol. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "big winning display") is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, while the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), the ball When a ball is entered into the 1 start hole 64a, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. is also shown. In the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, there is one reserved design (in the normal display mode, "○" design ( White circle patterns)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is one time, and when a total of two reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved design display areas Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special design indicates that it is 2 times, and when a total of three reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 1 first to third reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 3 times, and if a total of four reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 4 times. In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 0 and there is a fluctuation effect that is reserved indicate not to

Also, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation performance (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball When a ball is entered into the second starting port 64b, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. is also shown. In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved design for each second special design reserved ball (one reserved ball) (in the normal display mode, "○" design ( White circle patterns)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db2a to Db2d.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, if one reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is one time, and when a total of two reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved design display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special design indicates that it is 2 times, and when a total of three reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special design indicates that it is 3 times, and if a total of four reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 4 times. In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 0 and there is a fluctuation effect that is reserved indicate not to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. is configured to Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed is completed, when the reserved ball with the first special symbol and the reserved ball with the second special symbol are stored, The second lottery game of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). The lottery game may be executed in order of winning, or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, It is configured to display an execution symbol larger than each of the reserved symbols displayed in each of the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. In addition, in this execution design display area Db0, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution design. be.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when the variable effect is completed, and along with the erasure of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (if it is the first special symbol, the right side, the second 2 If it is a special symbol, it is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved designs of the second special design and there are four reserved designs of the first special design, the end of the fluctuation production of the first special design or the second special design When the execution design displayed in the execution design display area Db0 is erased along with, when the reservation design is displayed in the special figure 1 first reservation design display area Db1a, as the execution design in the execution design display area Db0 It is moved (shifted) and displayed. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved design display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a. Furthermore, when a reserved design is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved design display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 1 second reserved design display area Db1b. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved design display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 1 third reserved design display area Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is done, when the reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution design in the execution design display area Db0. In addition, when a reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved design display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a. Furthermore, when a reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved design display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 2 second reserved design display area Db2b. Also, when a reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved design display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 2 third reserved design display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, the execution symbols are continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (during the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach"). ). On the other hand, when the variable effect is finished, or when the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution pattern is erased. That is, when the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variable effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variable presentation is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variable element of 'super reach' or the variable element of 'special reach' is being executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "holding change notice" can be executed by using the holding pattern and the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display region Db. This "reserved change notice" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit to be executed in the main display area Dm is changed in a plurality of stages in the display colors of reserved symbols and executed symbols from before the execution of the variable performance to during the execution of the variable performance. It is a notice suggested by

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display colors of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are changed from the normal display mode of "white" to the blue display mode of "blue" and red as the "suspension change notice". It is configured to be changeable to "red" in the mode or "rainbow color" in the rainbow color display mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when the "big win display" or "ready-to-win display" occurs in the variable effect, the selection ratio of the display colors of the pending symbols and the executed symbols is different. By changing the display color of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern from the normal display mode ("white") to another display mode (for example, "blue"), the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is " It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of occurrence of "ready-to-win display" or "big win display" for each display color.

Specifically, in the "reserved change notice", when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"), the fluctuation indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern In the production, the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is higher. set. Furthermore, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "rainbow color" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved design and the execution design is "red", the mode of production (mainly The mode of production is referred to as "production mode") or "special reach" production mode (hereinafter, "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode may be collectively referred to as "super reach or higher" production mode. ) is set to be determined. Furthermore, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is "rainbow color", it is set so that the appearance of the "jackpot display" is confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern of the "rainbow color". It is Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the order of normal ("white") → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow color". It is set so that the expectation of the appearance of

It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow color" of the "suspended change notice" is set so as not to appear in the suspended symbols, but to appear only in the executed symbols. This is because, after displaying a “rainbow color” display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot with a pending symbol, if the pending symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power failure), the player can obtain Dissatisfaction occurs due to not being able to get the big win that should be received. Therefore, in the reserved symbols, the occurrence of dissatisfaction can be prevented in advance by configuring so as not to appear in advance the display mode of the "rainbow color" that confirms the occurrence of the big win.

Further, due to this "reserved change notice", in a state where the display mode of the reserved design is changed, when the reserved design is shifted along with the execution (digestion) of the variable production, the display mode of the changed reserved design is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected to the previous reserved pattern or executed pattern. That is, when the display mode of the reserved design changes, even when the changed reserved design shifts to other reserved design display areas Db1 to Db3 or the execution design display area Db0 with the execution of the variable effect, the display before the shift The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved design changes to "red" in the special figure 1 fourth reserved design display area Db1d, the reserved design is special figure 1 third reserved design display area Db1c → special figure 1 second reserved When the symbol display area Db1b → the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a → the executed symbol display area Db0 is shifted respectively, the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol is continuously displayed. be.

In the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be suspended up to four times, respectively. The number of balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.

Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁It should be noted that, if the third symbol display device 81 does not display information about the number of pending balls (such as pending symbols), it is not possible to execute the "suspended change notice" by the pending symbols. It may be constructed such that by making it appear, a pre-reading notice similar to the "pending change notice" is executed.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed. It should be noted that, when configured to display the number of pending balls by the pending lamp, by providing a plurality of types of display colors for the pending lamp, it is of course possible to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the "holding change notice" of the first embodiment. is possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved pattern indicating the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable effect has not been executed among the balls entered into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, This is an area for displaying execution symbols related to the variable performance being executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of the notice pattern is displayed, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a big win than usual. Suggested to the player.

In the secondary display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in the first embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm is performed. Based on this, a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, the color of the headband, which is usually white, changes, and another character appears. is done.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) appears to indicate step by step whether or not a big win will occur in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected occurrence of the "ready-to-win display" in the variable performance being executed and the expectation of the big win increase based on the appearance of the warning symbols etc. It is configured to indicate that a big win is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "ready-to-reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric combination 64c enters an operating state corresponding to the game state ( the rotating plate is rotated).

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is lit and displayed in the normal symbol reservation lamp 84. - 特許庁Four normal design reservation lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reservations, and are arranged above the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal design display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special design display device 37 or the third design display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of balls held through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the prize winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64a, 64b and 65 are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In addition, as described above, the ball that has flowed into the out port 66 is detected by an out switch (not shown) arranged on a collection plate (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13, and the game is played. It is configured to be able to detect that a ball hit into the area is ejected outside the game area. Further, the balls entered into the respective prize winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64a, 64b, 65 are collected by the gathering plate and detected by the out switch. The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 8 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113 (hereinafter, payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113 may be collectively referred to as "sub-controller 111, 113") to instruct the operation In order to do so, various control commands (hereinafter, "CC" may be added to the control commands, see FIG. 18) are sent from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 as data transmission/reception. Although sent by circuitry, such commands are only sent in one direction from main controller 110 through encryption device 300 to sub-controllers 111 and 113 .

The main control unit 110 controls the main parts of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of dynamic display and variable effects on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of variable display results on the normal symbol display device 83. process. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reservation number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a prize winning opening open table 202f, a general pattern per random number table 202g, a general pattern fluctuation table 202h, At least an ordinary electric service release table 202i and a manufacturing number storage section 202j are stored. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like, jackpot lottery, dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, etc. To do so, it is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot pattern. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance mode, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. A variation type counter CS1 used for .

In addition, for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, the normal pattern per counter C4 is used, and for the initial value setting of the normal pattern per counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "4 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). , and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 as appropriate. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas has the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 899"), and reaches the maximum value (eg, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from "0 to 899". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 25).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64a (starting winning), the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a (first special symbol) is provided. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reservation first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 64b (start winning), the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol) It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation area of any one of the second reservation first to fourth areas.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 hits the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot stored in the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1 of the reservation area. If the value of the random number counter C1 coincides with the value of the random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a jackpot.

Details of the jackpot random number table 202a will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The jackpot random number table 202a has a low probability used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal game state" or a "shortened time state", which is a special symbol low probability state (period not "probability fluctuation state") For the probability state and for the high probability state used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a ``probability variable state (variable probability)'' which is a high probability state of a special pattern with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low probability state. It is divided into two types. The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the case of the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of special symbols in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900=1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that will be a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 9, and the values "28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866" are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbols in the high probability state (that is, the "variable probability state") is set to 9/900=1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so as not to overlap each other. is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description is continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64a (starting winning), the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a (first special symbol) is provided. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 64b (start winning), the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol) It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, it is lost. If it is a random number, the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be those at the time of losing. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that becomes a jackpot, the variation pattern and stop in the variation effect The type will be the one at the time of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of "0-99". Based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202, the jackpot type is determined. The jackpot type table 202b includes a jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a jackpot type for special figure 2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. A table 202b2 is provided.

Here, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b). FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 11(b) is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol to be won. As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the jackpot type table 202b associates the type of the special symbol, the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the special symbol, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. It is a table.

The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Moreover, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be changed.

As for the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the next jackpot occurs in the special pattern fluctuation effect, both the special pattern jackpot probability and the normal pattern hit probability are high. State "10R probability variable jackpot" is "variable A", and after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, until the next big hit occurs in the special pattern fluctuation effect, the special pattern jackpot probability and normal patterns "4R probability variable jackpot" which is a "4R probability variable jackpot" where the probability of hitting is both high probability, and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the normal pattern of the normal pattern until the variable effect of the special pattern is executed 100 times. The probability of hitting will be in a high probability state, but the probability of hitting a special symbol will be in a low probability state (so-called 100 times of time reduction). After the number of rounds is 4 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, the probability of winning the normal symbol is high, but the probability of the special symbol is low (so-called time saving). 50 times), and there is a “time saving B” that is a “4R time saving jackpot” that shifts to a “time saving state”.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 in FIG. 11(a), the value "0 to 19" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "10R probability variable jackpot", which is "variable probability A". The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "20 to 79" is associated with the "variable probability B" that is the "4R variable jackpot", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 " 80 to 99” are associated.

In the winning lottery of the first special symbols in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d becomes the jackpot. If it is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "15", "probability variable A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "35", the jackpot "Variable probability B" corresponding to "4R variable probability jackpot" is determined as the type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", "Time saving B" corresponding to "4R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. be.

That is, when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (that is, the lottery based on the ball entering the first start port 64a), the jackpot type of "variable probability A" is selected at a rate of 20%. , the jackpot type of "probability variation B" is selected at a rate of 60%, and the jackpot type of "time reduction B" is evenly selected at a rate of 20%. That is, in the first lottery game of the first special symbols, the ``probability variable B'' jackpot type is most likely to be selected, while the ``time reduction A'' jackpot type cannot be selected.

In addition, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 in FIG. 11(b), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 79" is associated with "10R probability variable jackpot" "variable probability A", The value "80 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A" which is "10R time saving jackpot".

In the winning lottery for the second special symbol in the first embodiment, as in the winning lottery for the first special symbol, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of one of the second reserved ball storage areas 203e. When the value of the counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same reservation area is the jackpot type table for special figure 2. 202b2.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "10", "probability variable A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "85", the jackpot As the type, "time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" is determined.

That is, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (that is, the lottery based on the ball entering the second start port 64b), the jackpot type of "variable probability A" is selected at a rate of 80%. , and the jackpot type of "time saving A" is configured to be selected at a rate of 20%. Therefore, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol, while the "probability variation A" jackpot type is most likely to be selected, the "probability variation B" and "time reduction B" jackpot types cannot be selected. It is configured.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the lottery game with the second special symbols is more valuable for the player than the lottery game with the first special symbols. A lottery with a special pattern, that is, a game property is created in which the ball is entered into the second start hole 64b rather than into the first start hole 64a, and variations are provided in the game to enhance the interest of the game. .

The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Moreover, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. Specifically, the "non-reach (short)" production mode or "non-reach (long)" production mode in which the "reach display" does not occur, and the "normal reach" variable element as the "reach display" are executed. "Normal Reach" effect mode, "Super Reach" effect mode in which the variable elements of "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of "Super Reach" are executed, and "Special Reach" is developed from the variable elements of "Normal Reach". , and the "Special Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of " is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode are defined as " This is an effect mode in which the same third pattern does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the "ready-to-win display" does not occur after the variable element "high-speed variation" is performed.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) in the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81. The variable element is a variable element in which the third symbol is scrolled at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed as

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed except for a specific production mode ("non-reach (short)" production mode). It is configured to be The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6(a)). It refers to a variable element that scrolls the third pattern at a low speed at a possible speed. In this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, the third symbols are displayed in the order of left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol. Stop displaying the pattern. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is considered that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and develops into a variable element of "normal reach", while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When the different third symbol stops, the medium symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is terminated (except for the case where it develops into a "pseudo run" to be described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "low-speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed. ) are stopped in order, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is completed, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops at the same time, and the 1 variable effect ends.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode is a variable production of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" This is one of the production modes. In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display area Dm1) and right symbol row Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm are Displayed larger than usual. Further, the third symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) are scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and displayed in a state in which the player can visually recognize the third symbols in the middle display area Dm2. . Furthermore, in this "normal reach" variable, the sub-display area Ds is erased (not shown) as the main display area Dm is enlarged.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "super reach" production mode, during execution of the "super reach" variable element, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is erased from the display state of the "normal reach" variable element, and this " The reach formation pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character designs are made to appear to perform "battle effect (for example, kickboxing)" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "battle effect", it is configured to suggest the suitability of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be a "big win display", When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "special reach" effect mode, while the "special reach" variable element is being executed, the display state of the "normal reach" variable element changes from the display state of the "normal reach" variable element to the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6 (a)) is erased, and the reach forming pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of this "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the variable elements of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable elements of "super reach" appear to create a "competition effect". (eg, car race)” (not shown).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "competition effect", it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be "big win display". When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64a (starting winning), the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a (first special symbol) is provided. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 64b (start winning), the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol) It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation first to fourth areas.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether the variable performance is appropriate, the current game state, and the number of variable performances currently pending (the number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects during standby (the number of pending balls) and the like.

Also, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number table 202c on hold provided in the ROM202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability change state", "time reduction state" or "normal game state". and (3) how many balls of the suspended variable effect are on hold, the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode in the case of winning the jackpot lottery and the case of losing the jackpot lottery. are made different, the degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode in which it is easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big win, it is easy to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and it is difficult to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win, based on the stop pattern table 202d. It is configured to select the effect mode of. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is configured so that it is difficult to select an effect that is likely to cause a big win and that it is easy to select an effect that is unlikely to cause a big win. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third pattern in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win in the variable performance and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of the variation performance, it is difficult to generate a big win, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode, the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variation performance.

In addition, as a second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on balls entering the second starting port 64b in the state of reaching . Specifically, the number of standby times for the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and since the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability In the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b in the "fluctuation state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the second start port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the second start port The lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired even though the ball is entered into 64b. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64a, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the balls. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor (hall).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol) is easily reached, and the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged to be a machine with which it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the game will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of balls held in the variable performance is small, the performance mode of the variable performance is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected. It is As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a variation performance based on the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, whether the variation performance is appropriate, Based on the game state at that time and the total number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at that time, the number of reservations table 202c is referred to, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected. is configured to Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c in FIG. 12, when the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3" at the time of extracting a loss in the "normal game state" in which a left-handed game is performed, Alternatively, when the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which a right-handed game is performed is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is "1", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 13(a)) is selected.

In addition, when the loss is extracted in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed and the number of retained balls is "4 to 8", or the "probability fluctuation state" or "time" in which the right-handed game is performed At the time of extracting the loss of "shortened state" and the number of reserved balls is "2 to 8", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 13(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when the jackpot is won, any game state (that is, "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and any number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 8) Even if there is, the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

That is, when any one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when there is no (that is, at the time of loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of held balls and the game state at that time.

It should be noted that the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a jackpot is won. For example, when a big hit is won and the number of pending balls is large, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected It may be configured to allow selection of the "Special Reach" effect mode, etc.).

In this case, in each performance mode in which 'ready-to-reach display' is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the variable element part of 'high-speed fluctuation' is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation production is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" ends (when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the rendering mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" rendering mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 13(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, on the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a comparatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable production being held. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (short)" effect mode with a short variable effect time is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Also, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode A "non-reach (long)" presentation mode with a long variable presentation time is selected. As a result, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode with a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected can be performed, so that the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b can be performed. It becomes easy to secure the ball entry time to the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new start winning will occur during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation where the variable performance is executed. can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of holding balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64a Alternatively, the determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entry are performed so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. is configured to

Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance, but the A table 202d1 and B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is the same, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to the other effect mode is the same. The values of the stop pattern selection counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if the pre-reading notice is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, the effect that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice in the variable performance that is the target of the pre-reading notice. can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”. Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, each "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set to 5% for the "normal reach" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach" effect mode.

Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of “special reach” production mode > “super reach” production mode > “normal reach” production mode, and in the fluctuation production at the time of losing, “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode > "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player according to the type of performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the state in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held in the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on, it is possible to select a performance mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing the pre-reading notice, the number of pending balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading notice and the pre-reading notice It may differ from the number of held balls at the time of execution of the variable production. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description is continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 25). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64a (starting winning), the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a (first special symbol) is provided. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 64b (start winning), the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol) It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determining fluctuation patterns. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as a variation pattern table 202e, a variation pattern table 202e1 for losing, which is commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and the first special symbol and A large winning variation pattern table 202e2 that is commonly used in all game states at the time of the second special symbol big winning is prepared.

FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is commonly used in the lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the losing variation pattern table 202e1 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" and "non-reach (short)" are referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined. "E1: non-reach (short)" referred to when the mode is determined, "E2: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and "super reach" performance mode are divided into "E3: Super reach" which is referred to when is determined, and "E4: Special reach" which is referred to when the "Special reach" effect mode is determined. In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E5: Normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: Super reach" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined It is divided into "E7: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol If the value is not a big hit value (jackpot random value), that is, if the value is a losing value, the game state at that point and the pending ball at that point are determined by referring to the pending number table 202c. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number and, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the losing variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. determined as a variation pattern.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high speed variation", the variable element of "low speed variation", the variable element of "pseudo variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach" A variable element, a "special reach" variable element and a "re-variant" variable element are provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected, the variable elements of this "high-speed fluctuation" are performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production, and the variable elements other than "non-reach (short)" ( For example, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, "10 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect. It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "10 seconds" is executed, and it is determined whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled and varied to generate "ready-to-win display". It is a variable element to show. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected, and production modes other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode (for example, "non-reach (long) )” presentation mode) is selected, it is performed for “5 seconds” after the variable element of “high-speed variation”. That is, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are displayed without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). In addition, when the variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of "normal reach" described later is started (executed) Alternatively, it is configured such that the variable production is terminated as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "5 seconds".

A variable element of "pseudo-variation" is a variable element in which a variable performance starts a plurality of times (a pseudo-stop occurs once) in one variable performance. Specifically, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "high speed variation" is started and switched to the variable element of "low speed variation", and then all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 It is a variable element in which a unit effect is performed such that the variable effect is terminated and a predetermined stop result (for example, a pseudo consecutive chance number "677") is displayed. This "pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation element is generated by stopping the predetermined stop result after the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, so that the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element starts again from the stop result, as if one more time. An effect is executed as if the variable effect was started.

As for the "pseudo-variation" variable element, a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo consecutive chance) appears after the "low-speed variation" variable element is executed, and the "high-speed variation" variable element is executed again for the second time. , and then it is a variable element that develops into the variable element of "normal reach". That is, the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" is a pseudo fluctuation stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo stop") in which pseudo consecutive chances are displayed. It is the variable that appears and again initiates the "fast change" variable. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that at least the variable element of "normal reach" always develops after the variable element of "pseudo-variation" ends. This "pseudo-variation" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the "slow variation" variation element.

In the first embodiment, the number of times of pseudo stop is set to 1 in the variable element of "pseudo change", but the number of times of pseudo stop is 2 or more. may be configured. In addition, before the occurrence of the "pseudo-variation" variable element, a variable element (so-called "pseudo-gase" variable element) that performs an effect as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance eye will stop may be performed. . In this "pseudo fake" variable element, an effect as to whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the "low-speed variation" variable element (for example, the pattern forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 ( (Refer to FIG. 6(a)) Effect of reciprocating up and down to stop) is performed so that the predetermined stop result does not appear in the effect and does not develop into a "pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation element. may be configured. By providing this "pseudo fake" variable element, after the end of the "pseudo fake" variable element, it develops into a "normal reach" variable element, or a "losing display" appears (for example, "687 ”) to end the variable performance as it is.

"Normal reach" fluctuation elements are "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements or "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation elements (hereinafter, ""low speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements or "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation elements" are collectively referred to as "low speed Variation showing whether or not a big hit will occur as a result of the variation of the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach formation symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 is an element. This variable element of "normal reach" is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of "low speed variation, etc.".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, a pattern of directly displaying "loss display", a pattern of directly displaying "jackpot display", and a pattern of "super reach" are displayed. A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The "super reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "performance". This "super reach" variable is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The "special reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and the "competition" in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "performance". This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" suddenly develops without going through the variable element of "normal reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "5 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when a big win is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If you go to , there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, this "re-variation" variation element is configured to be selected only in the variation pattern table 202e for big wins and not selected in the variation pattern table 202e for loss.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" includes "fast variation (long)" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds". variable element + variable element of "low-speed variation"" (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time"). 14 and 15, the term "variable element" will be omitted for convenience of explanation.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 9", and only ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing which is referred to when executing the fluctuation production in any gaming state during the losing lottery, all values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. (“0 to 9”) is associated with “high-speed fluctuation (long)”+“low-speed fluctuation”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect, "high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" is always selected as the change pattern.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 14, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "low-speed variation" is the first half of the "pseudo-variation", in which the chance symbol develops and further the chance symbol appears. It is configured to be the same as the variation time of the “pseudo-continuation” effect that indicates whether or not it will appear, and is configured so that the “low-speed variation” can be replaced with the “pseudo-variation” on the sound ramp control device 113 side. there is

Specifically, for example, when "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" is selected in the main controller 110 and the effect is transmitted to the audio ramp controller 113, the audio ramp controller 113, in the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, either ``high speed variation (long)'' + ``low speed variation'' or ``high speed variation (long)'' + ``pseudo variation'' as transmitted. It is configured so that it can be selected and executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute an effect that is greater than the type of variable time selected by the main controller 110, and while increasing the variation of the effect, the number of variable times stored in the main controller 110 is reduced. As a result, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Next, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, for "E1: non-reach (short)", one variation pattern of "only" high-speed variation (short)" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" is prepared. ing.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only "fast fluctuation (short)". , and it is set to be selectable only for "only 'high-speed variation (short)'".

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing which is referred to when the fluctuation production is executed in any gaming state during the losing lottery, all values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “fast fluctuation (short)””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect, "only "high-speed change (short)"" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the change pattern table for losing 202e1, "E2: normal reach" includes "high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" + "normal reach" with an overall change time of "20 seconds", Two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds". , and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" 0 to 6" and "7 to 9" for "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach"" is 70%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach"" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%. Therefore, in the variable effect including the effect element of "normal reach" selected at the time of losing, the change pattern of ""high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" + "normal reach"" is more likely to be selected (70%). there is

Next, in the change pattern table for losing 202e1, "E3: super reach" includes "high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" + "super reach" with a total change time of "30 seconds", Two fluctuation patterns can be selected: "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" with an overall fluctuation time of "40 seconds" A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the variation pattern in the "E4: Super reach" production mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ""high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "super reach". "0 to 7" for "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Super reach" "8, 9", It has become.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 80%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo reach" is 80%. fluctuation”+“high-speed fluctuation (short)”+“low-speed fluctuation”+“super reach”” is set to be selected at a rate of 20%. Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is likely to be selected.

Next, in the change pattern table for losing 202e1, "E4: special reach" includes "high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" + "special reach" with a total change time of "40 seconds"; Two fluctuation patterns can be selected: "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" with an overall fluctuation time of "50 seconds" A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" "0 to 8" for "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" is "9" .

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is 90%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo reach" is 90%. fluctuation"+"fast fluctuation (short)"+"pseudo fluctuation"+"special reach"" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is likely to be selected.

It should be noted that the variation pattern at the time of failure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting the presence or absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The big hit variation pattern table 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the effect mode, "E5: normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined It is divided into "E7: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of a jackpot random number counter C1 is a value (jackpot random number value) for a jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of a jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area and the game state at the time of start winning. , and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the big win variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E5: normal reach" includes ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" with an overall fluctuation time of "20 seconds", and the total fluctuation time is "25 seconds" with "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation", and total fluctuation time is "30 seconds" with "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach"" and "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" Fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation"" are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" 0", "1, 2" against ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation", ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + " "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" "3 to 5", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation ” + “Normal Reach” + “Revariation” is “6 to 9”.

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach"" is 10%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is 20%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation The pattern is 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation" is 40%. is set to be selected by

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation" is likely to be selected (40% of the total). However, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation", "high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “high speed fluctuation (short)” + “low speed fluctuation” + “normal reach”” can also be selected, so that you can expect a big hit from any fluctuation pattern. can provide.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "super reach" with an overall variation time of "30 seconds", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of "35 seconds" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "40 seconds" )” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “fast fluctuation (short)” + “slow fluctuation” + “super reach”” and “high speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” with a total fluctuation time of “45 seconds” + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Super reach" + "Re-fluctuation"" are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Super reach" "0, 1", "2 to 4" for ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation", "high speed fluctuation (long)" + " "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "Fast Fluctuation (Short)" + "Low Fluctuation" + "Super Reach", "5, 6", "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" + "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "Fast Fluctuation (Short )”+“low-speed fluctuation”+“super reach”+“re-fluctuation”” is “7 to 9”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 20%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" is 20%. The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation" is 30%, ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach ” fluctuation pattern is 20%, and the fluctuation pattern of ““ high speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “high speed fluctuation (short)” + “low speed fluctuation” + “super reach” + “re-fluctuation” It is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern including the production element of "re-variation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re- "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Super reach" + "Re-fluctuation") are likely to be selected (overall 60%). However, fluctuation patterns that do not include the production element of "re-fluctuation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach") or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" +"high-speed variation (short)" +"low-speed variation" +"super reach") can also be selected, thereby providing a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, "E7: special reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "special reach"" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of "45 seconds" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "50 seconds" )” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “fast fluctuation (short)” + “low speed fluctuation” + “special reach””, and “high speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” with a total fluctuation time of “55 seconds” + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation"" are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" "0 to 2", "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" + "Revariation", "3, 4", "High speed fluctuation (long)" + " ``Pseudo Fluctuation'' + ``Fast Fluctuation (Short)'' + ``Low Fluctuation'' + ``Special Reach'' is ``5 to 7'', ``Fast Fluctuation (Long)'' + ``Pseudo Fluctuation'' + )”+“low-speed fluctuation”+“special reach”+“re-fluctuation”” is “8, 9”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is 30%, and "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" is 30%. Fluctuation + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" is 20%, and "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" "" fluctuation pattern is 30%, "" high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-fluctuation"" fluctuation pattern It is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern that does not include the production element of "re-variation" (that is, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach") , ``high speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``high speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``low speed fluctuation'' + ``super reach'''') are likely to be selected (60% of the total). However, fluctuation patterns that include the production element of "re-fluctuation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation" or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "High Speed Fluctuation (Short)" + "Low Speed Fluctuation" + "Super Reach" + "Refluctuation") can also be selected, so you can expect a big win from any fluctuation pattern. can provide sexuality.

In this way, when a big win is won, a comparatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the performance contents of the variation performance in which a big win occurs, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the performance contents of the variation performance at the time of the loss and performing the variation performance. It can be digested efficiently.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or "reach display" before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, or if the reach is established , It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol that is to be stopped last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

In addition, in the big winning variation pattern table 202e2, it was configured so that a variation pattern common to the variation pattern that can be selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 can be selected, but a unique variation pattern selected only in the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 It may be configured to provide a variation pattern. In addition, although it is configured so that a variation pattern can be selected regardless of the jackpot type, a unique variation pattern that is selected only for a predetermined jackpot type (for example, a jackpot type that can generate a "probability fluctuation state") is provided. It may be configured as

Furthermore, among the presentation modes selected by the main controller 110, there may be provided a presentation mode in which a variable element of "pseudo variation" is executed, in which the number of pseudo stops (the number of stops of chance eye symbols) is performed two or more times. . Alternatively, the variation element of "pseudo-variation" may not be executed, and the chance symbol may appear in the variation element of "low-speed variation" to develop a "pseudo-run" effect.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. As described above, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, when a jackpot is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, reference is made for opening control of the variable winning device (big winning opening) 65. A special prize opening opening table 202f is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the big winning opening open table 202f will be described. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the big winning opening opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The large winning opening opening table 202f is referred to when the first special symbol or the second special symbol hits, and based on the jackpot type that generated the special symbol jackpot, the opening mode of the variable winning device (big winning opening) 65 ( number of times, maximum open time, maximum number of winning prizes) are defined.

The big winning opening opening table 202f of the first embodiment is divided based on the jackpot type of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for "variable probability A" to be referred to when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", for "variable probability B" to be referred to when winning the jackpot type "variable probability B", and for the jackpot type " The opening mode of the variable winning device 65 is changed for "time saving A" referred to when winning the time saving A" and for "time saving B" referred when winning the jackpot type "time saving B". be.

As shown in FIG. 16, the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set when winning the jackpot type "Variable Probability A" is "10 times", and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the variable winning device 65 is It is regulated to be ``30 seconds'', the maximum winning number is ``10'', and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the variable winning device 65 is defined to be ``10''. .

In addition, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "probability variation A" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is also high, and the next special symbol. Until the big hit occurs, the "time saving function" is given (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "until the next time"), and the winning auxiliary function for the second start port 64b is activated to the "probability fluctuation state" Transition.

Next, the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set when winning the jackpot type ``Variable Probability B'' is ``4 times'', and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the variable winning device 65 is ``30 seconds''. In addition, the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the variable winning device 65 is defined to be "10". That is, in the jackpot type “probability variable B”, a game value less than the jackpot game value that can be provided in the jackpot type “variability A” can be given as the game value given in the jackpot.

In addition, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "variable probability B" is the same as the jackpot type "variable probability A", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is also high. state, and the "time saving function" is given until the next time, and shifts to the "probability variation state" in which the winning auxiliary function for the second start port 64b operates. That is, the jackpot type "variable probability B" is set so that the game state after the end of the jackpot game is equivalent to the jackpot type "variable probability A", but the gaming value obtained in the jackpot is smaller than that of the jackpot type "variable probability A". Therefore, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the jackpot type "variable probability A" rather than the jackpot type "variable probability B".

Next, the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set when winning the jackpot type “time saving A” is “10 times”, and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the variable winning device 65 is “30 seconds”. In addition, the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the variable winning device 65 is defined to be "10". That is, in the jackpot type “time saving A”, as the game value given in the jackpot, a game value equivalent to the jackpot game value that can be given in the jackpot type “probability variable A” can be given.

In addition, the transition game state after the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving A" is a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, while the probability of the normal symbol is a high probability state during the first predetermined period. It shifts to a "time reduction state". Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot type "time saving A", the hit probability of the normal pattern is in a high probability state until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special pattern is executed 100 times, and , the opening time of the normal electric terminal 64c becomes long (that is, 3 seconds), and the winning assist function for the second starting port 64b is activated.

Next, the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set when winning the jackpot type "time saving B" is "10 times", and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the variable winning device 65 is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the variable winning device 65 is defined to be "10". That is, since the jackpot type "time reduction B" is set so that the gaming value obtained in the jackpot is less than the jackpot type "time reduction A", the player can choose the jackpot type "time reduction B" rather than the jackpot type "time reduction B". A game is played with the aim of winning "A".

In addition, the transition game state after the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B" is a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, while the probability of winning the normal symbol is a second predetermined period shorter than the first period. During the period, it will shift to a "time reduction state" that is a high probability state. Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot type "time saving B", until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special pattern is executed 50 times, the hit probability of the normal pattern is in a high probability state, and , the opening time of the normal electric terminal 64c becomes long (that is, 3 seconds), and the winning assist function for the second starting port 64b is activated.

In this way, since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each jackpot type that is won, it is possible to create a difference in the game value that is directly given according to the jackpot type that is won. In addition, by changing the game state to be shifted after the jackpot game for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make a difference in the game performance after the jackpot ends based on the jackpot type won. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbols, it is possible to create a playability of determining which jackpot type is won or not, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the opening mode of the variable winning device 65 based on the jackpot type (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls, and transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. be. Specifically, the number of opening times may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. you can Moreover, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types.

In addition, during the jackpot game, the game state is once equivalent to the "normal game state", that is, the probability of winning the normal symbols is low, the variable display time of the normal symbols is also long, and the normal The open time of the electric terminal 64c is also configured to transition (transition) to a state of short time. By configuring in this way, during the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult to give a game value other than opening the variable winning device 65 (for example, the long opening of the normal electric combination 64c). It is possible to calculate the ball output rate separately for the middle and the middle. As a result, it becomes easier to calculate the ball payout rate when designing the game specifications, and the man-hours for designing the game specifications can be reduced.

Furthermore, in one round of the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 may be opened and closed multiple times. Specifically, for example, in one round, after the opening of the variable winning device 65 is started, it is closed once in a predetermined number of seconds (for example, "5 seconds") less than the maximum opening time, and is closed for a predetermined closing time ( For example, the variable winning device 65 may be opened again after "1 second") and closed again when the maximum opening time elapses or when the maximum winning number is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the jackpot game and improve the interest of the game.

Alternatively, a large winning opening other than the variable winning device 65 may be provided, and the variable winning device 65 and the other large winning openings may be opened at one jackpot. Specifically, for example, in one jackpot, first, the variable winning device 65 is opened at the start of one round, and the variable winning device 65 is closed (so-called interval) at the end of the round. Immediately after closing, the other big prize openings are opened with the start of the next round, the other big prize openings are closed with the end of the round, and thereafter the variable prize winning device 65 and other big prizes are opened for each round. Configure the mouth to open and close alternately (rapidly). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the state (that is, interval time) in which the variable prize winning device 65 and the like are closed during the jackpot game, and to realize rapid awarding of game value.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description is continued. The normal figure per counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). In addition, when the counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) 1 for each It is updated twice and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 25).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20)), and the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 In, it is stored in one of the general pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203g of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203h in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203g, and the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203h hit judgment.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal pattern is set by the random number table 202g per normal pattern stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, "1/10" in the low probability state, "9/10"), and the value of the normal-pattern per counter C4 stored in the normal-pattern holding ball execution area 203h matches the random number value set by the normal-pattern random number table 202g. is judged to be a hit. Then, referring to the normal pattern variation table 202h stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the game state, the normal pattern variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set After the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, according to the game state, the normal electric role opening table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is referred to, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the normal electric role 64c (for example, "0.5 seconds" or " 5 seconds”) is set, and during the open time, the rotary plate is rotated, and during that time, the ball can roll on the upper surface of the rotary plate.

On the other hand, if the value of the counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203h does not match the random number value set by the normal pattern random number table 202g, it is determined to be lost. be. Then, according to the game state, the variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202h, and the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83 After that, the "x" symbol is illuminated and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol).

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that variations in the success/failure probability of the normal symbols, the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the normal electric player 64c are different according to each game state. . Specifically, for example, in a "normal game state" that does not have a "time saving function", the probability of success or failure of normal symbols is low, the variable display time of normal symbols is long, and the rotating plate The opening time is set to be short. In addition, in the "variable probability state" or the "shortened time state" having the "time function", the success probability of the normal symbols is high, the variable display time of the normal symbols is short, and the rotation plate is opened. The time is set to be long.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is provided with various tables. And according to each of the tables 202a to 202g described above, a pachinko machine such as a jackpot lottery, a dynamic display and variable effect setting in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the normal symbol display device 83 Ten main processes can be performed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. As described above, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is provided with the manufacturing number storage section 202j. The manufacturing number storage unit 202j stores the manufacturing number SN unique to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 18) when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. The serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 202j is written with the same information as the serial number SN stored in the authentication card 500 that is issued when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the serial number command is issued based on the serial number data stored in the serial number storage unit 202j. generated and transmitted to the encryption device 300 (see S714 in FIG. 28).

Upon receiving the serial number command output from main controller 110 when the power is turned on, encryption device 300 generates a work key based on the serial number SN indicated by the serial number command. , see FIG. 18) (see S1002 in FIG. 27), and stores the work key Kw in the work key storage unit 303a provided in the RAM 303 of the encryption device 300, which will be described later. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each time a control command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113, it is stored in the work key storage unit 303a in the encryption device 300. The work key Kw is used to encrypt a scramble key (Scramble Key. Hereinafter, the scramble key may be appended with "Ks". See FIG. 18.). The encryption and decryption of control commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

The RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as counters, Input/Output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the start-up process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned on. A non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 is designed to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, and a general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203g. , It has at least a normal figure holding ball execution area 203h.

The first holding ball number counter 203a counts the number of balls entered into the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first The entry of the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b may be referred to as "starting winning"), the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the display device 81 .

This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (S713 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64a is detected and the number of pending balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 21 (see S203 of ). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 22).

The second pending ball number counter 203b, like the first pending ball number counter 203a, is the second start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) which is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the start winning to the mouth 64b (fluctuation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) up to 4 times.

As with the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization process (S713 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning to the second starting port 64b is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 21 (see S207 of ). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 22).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the number of reserved balls command is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 via the encryption device 300 (see S210 in FIG. 21). The pending ball number command is issued by voice lamp control from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 each time the first pending ball counter 203a or the second pending ball counter 203b is incremented by one after the start winning is detected. It is a command sent to the device 113 .

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each control command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is encrypted by the encryption device 300 (see FIG. 7), and , is multiplexed and sent to each of the sub-controllers 111 and 113 as a multiplexed command. Sub-controllers 111 and 113 that have received the multiplexed command transmit the multiplexed command to decoding device 400 (see FIG. 7), and decoding device 400 separates the received multiplexed command. After (processing), the information (master key Km, work key Kw, expiration date information ED (both (see FIG. 18))) to obtain control commands (authentication), and transmit the control commands to the sub-controllers 111 and 113, which are the multiplexed command transmission sources. The sub-controllers 111 and 113 that have received the control command from the decoding device 400 are configured to be able to execute various processes based on the control command.

With this configuration, when main controller 110 and authentication card 500 inserted into card insertion hole 410 (see FIG. 2) do not match (pairing is not successful), sub controller 111, Since the 113 cannot receive normal control commands, for example, when the main controller 110 has been modified by fraudulent acts, or illegal resale to unintended sales destinations by the game machine maker has occurred. In this case, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls by the payout motor 216 and the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 from being executed. Therefore, if the game machine maker does not intend to cheat or illegally resell the game, by preventing the normal game from being played on the pachinko machine 10, the game hall will not suffer any disadvantages due to the cheating. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be managed by the manufacturer.

Here, referring to FIGS. 17 and 18, detailed configurations of the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 and encryption of control commands transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 are described. Details of processing and decoding processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, and FIG. Command, hereinafter sometimes "CC" is attached to the control command) is encrypted by the encryption device 300 and then decrypted by the decryption device 400 via the sub-controllers 111 and 113. It is a diagram for explaining the flow until it reaches the sound lamp control device 113 or the payout control device 111. FIG. From here, while mainly explaining the electrical configuration of the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 in FIG. A specific flow (processing) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 17, the encryption device 300 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 is a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. It has a RAM 303 , an input port 304 electrically connected to the main controller 110 , and an output port 305 electrically connected to the sub controllers 111 and 113 .

The output side of the main controller 110 is connected to the input side of the input port 304 , and the encryption device 300 outputs a control command CC that instructs the execution contents of the sub-controllers 111 and 113 determined by the main controller 110 . receive. The MPU 301 of the encryption device 300 is connected to the output side of the input port 304 . The input side of the output port 305 is connected to the MPU 301 , and the output side of the output port 305 is connected to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 .

The pachinko machine 10 is a model with different lottery probabilities of jackpots and the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot, and at least one or more devices other than the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 (third symbol The display device 81, payout control device 111, display control device 114, encryption device 300 and/or decryption device 400) have exactly the same specifications, so the above devices are common parts to reduce costs. . In particular, the encryption device 300 only needs to have a function of encrypting and multiplexing the control commands output from the main control device 110, and the decryption device 400 receives the commands from the sub control devices 111 and 113. The received multiplexed command is demultiplexed and decrypted using the authentication card 500 (see FIG. 3) inserted in the card insertion hole 410 (see FIG. 2), and output to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 of the transmission source ( Since it is only necessary to have the function of replying, cost reduction can be achieved by using common parts between models with different specifications or between game machine manufacturers. In this case, it is necessary to share the scramble key Ks and the master key Km between each model (game machine manufacturer).

The MPU 301 of the encryption device 300 executes various controls for encrypting and multiplexing the control command CC input from the main control device 110 .

The ROM 302 of the encryption device 300 stores at least a scramble key storage unit 302a and a master key storage unit 302b as fixed value data in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 301 .

The scramble key storage unit 302a stores an encryption control command (Encryption Control Command) obtained by encrypting the control command CC transmitted (output) from the main controller 110. Hereinafter, when "ECC" is attached to the encryption control command , see FIG. 18) is stored. In the first embodiment, the scramble key Ks of the encryption device 300 is stored in the scramble key storage section 302a when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured.

The scramble key Ks of the encryption device 300 converts, calculates, and/or replaces the plaintext control command CC according to a predetermined procedure, and converts the content of the control command CC (game-related instruction (control) content). It consists of binary data of a predetermined bit length (for example, 256 bits) for generating the encrypted control command ECC in a random state different from the original state without damaging the original state. This scramble key Ks is a common key (secret key, hereinafter referred to as a scramble key Ks) obtained by decrypting the encrypted scramble key EKs stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b of the RAM 403 of the decryption device 400, which will be described later. , and so on.).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the encrypted control command ECC encrypted with the scramble key Ks pre-stored in the encryption device 300 is temporarily stored in the encrypted control command storage section 303b of the RAM 303 to be described later. (See S1101 in FIG. 28). It should be noted that the encrypted control command ECC does not make sense as it is encrypted (randomized). Since the sub-controllers 111 and 113 cannot read the content of the control command CC, predetermined error processing (for example, abnormal display by the third pattern display device 81 indicating that an abnormality has occurred, voice output device 226, and/or abnormal lighting by the lamp display device 227, etc.) are executed.

The master key storage unit 302b stores an encrypted work key (Encryption Work Key) obtained by encrypting the work key Kw stored in the work key storage unit 303a of the RAM 303, which will be described later. (see FIG. 18)) is stored. This master key Km is stored in the master key storage unit 302b when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, like the scramble key Ks.

The master key Km converts, computes, and/or replaces the work key Kw, which is a plain text, in a predetermined procedure different from that for the scramble key Ks, and restores the original state of the work key Kw without damaging the contents of the work key Km. It consists of binary data of a predetermined bit length (for example, 256 bits) for generating an encrypted work key EKw in a disordered state different from that. Also, this master key Km is a common key (secret key) shared with the master key Km stored in the master key storage unit 501b of the authentication card 500 paired with the pachinko machine 10 . It should be noted that encryption with the work key Kw may be configured to perform processing such as conversion, calculation and/or replacement in the same or equivalent procedure as the scramble key Ks.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the encrypted work key EKw encrypted with the master key Km of the encryption device 300 is temporarily stored in the encrypted work key storage unit 303d of the RAM 303 described later (see FIG. 28). (see S1103). Note that the encrypted work key EKw does not make sense as it is encrypted (randomized). , "EKs" may be attached to the encrypted scramble key (see FIG. 18)), the encrypted scramble key EKs cannot be decrypted.

The RAM 303 is provided with at least a work key storage unit 303a, an encrypted control command storage unit 303b, an encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c, an encrypted work key storage unit 303d, and a multiplexing command storage unit 303e.

The work key storage unit 303a is an area for storing a work key Kw for encrypting the scramble key Ks stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c of the ROM 302. FIG. The work key storage unit 303a stores a work key generated based on the serial number SN indicated by the serial number command when the serial number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Kw is stored (see S1002 and S1003 in FIG. 27). The work key Kw stored in the work key storage unit 303a is held until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The work key Kw stored (memorized) in the work key storage unit 303a converts the scramble key Ks, which is a plaintext, in a predetermined procedure different from the scramble key Ks and the master key Km, and processes such as conversion, calculation, and/or replacement. binary data of a predetermined bit length (for example, 256 bits) for generating an encrypted scramble key EKs in a random state different from the original state without damaging the content of the scramble key Ks. be. Further, the work key Kw stored in the work key storage unit 303a stores data that matches the serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 501a of the authentication card 500 paired with the pachinko machine 10. be.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the encrypted scramble key EKs encrypted with the work key Kw stored in the work key storage unit 303a is temporarily stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c described later (Fig. 28 S1102). Like the encrypted work key EKw, the encrypted encrypted scramble key EKs does not make sense as it is encrypted (randomized). The encrypted control command ECC cannot be decrypted even if an attempt is made to decrypt the ECC.

In this way, the encryption device 300 is configured to generate the work key Kw each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the main controller 110 can In the event of illegal exchange, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the work key Kw can be prevented from being normally generated.

As described above, the encrypted control command storage unit 303b temporarily stores the encrypted control command ECC obtained by encrypting the control command CC transmitted from the main controller 110 with the scramble key Ks stored in the scramble key storage unit 302a. This is an area for storing The encrypted control command ECC encrypted with the scramble key Ks is stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 303b (see S1101 in FIG. 28). and the encryption work key EKw to generate a multiplexing command (Multiplexing Encryption Control Command; hereinafter, the multiplexing command may be appended with "MECC"; see FIG. 18). The encrypted control command storage unit 303b storing the encrypted control command ECC is cleared (initialized) after the multiplexed command MECC is generated using the encrypted control command ECC. (See S1106 in FIG. 28).

In the first embodiment, the encryption and multiplexing of one control command CC will be described. commands, stop type commands, etc.) are transmitted, each control command CC is temporarily held by a command reception buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 303, and The control command CC received later is held in the command reception buffer until encryption and multiplexing are completed, and after the control command CC received earlier is completely encrypted and multiplexed, it is held in the command reception buffer. The encryption and multiplexing may be sequentially performed on the control command CC received after the transmission.

The encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c is an area for temporarily storing the encrypted scramble key EKs encrypted with the work key Kw, as described above. The encrypted scramble key EKs encrypted with the work key Kw is stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c (see S1102 in FIG. 28), and then the multiplexing command MECC is generated similarly to the encryption control command ECC. used to The encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c storing the encrypted scramble key EKs is cleared (initialized) after the multiplexing command MECC is generated using the encrypted scramble key EKs. (See S1106 in FIG. 28).

The encrypted work key storage unit 303d is an area for temporarily storing the encrypted work key EKw encrypted with the master key Km stored in the master key storage unit 302b, as described above. The encrypted work key EKw encrypted with the master key Km is stored in the encrypted work key storage unit 303d (see S1103 in FIG. 28), and thereafter, like the encryption control command ECC and the encrypted scramble key EKs, It is used to generate the multiplexed command MECC. The encrypted work key storage unit 303d storing the encrypted work key EKw is cleared (initialized) after the multiplexing command MECC is generated using the encrypted work key EKw. (See S1106 in FIG. 28).

The multiplexing command storage unit 303e stores the encrypted scramble key EKs stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c and the encrypted work for the encrypted control command ECC stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 303b. This area is for storing the multiplexed command MECC generated by embedding (multiplexing) the encrypted work key EKw stored in the key storage unit 303d. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, multiplexing is performed by code division multiplexing (CDM) in which multiple data are multiplied by different codes to synthesize and transmit signals, for example. A command MECC is generated.

The MPU 301 stores the encrypted scramble key EKs stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c and the encrypted work key storage unit 303d in response to the encrypted control command ECC stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 303b. The stored encrypted work key EKw is multiplexed by the above method to generate a multiplexed command MECC, which is stored in the multiplexed command storage unit 303e (see S1104 and S1105 in FIG. 28). The multiplexed command MECC stored in the multiplexed command storage unit 303e is non-encrypted (unencrypted) destination information (for example, if the command is 2 bytes, the uppermost byte of the command is High-order 2 bits including the high-order bit) is transmitted to the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1007 in FIG. 27). In this way, since the destination information, which is the destination of the control command CC, is unencrypted, it is possible to properly transmit the multiplexed command MECC to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 to be controlled. can.

Note that the multiplexed command in which the encrypted scramble key EKs and the encrypted work key EKw are multiplexed with the encrypted control command ECC does not make any sense as it is. The devices 111 and 113 are configured so that control based on the control command CC cannot be executed with the multiplexed command MECC as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17, the decoding device 400 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 401 includes at least a ROM 402 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 401, and a ROM 402 for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 4022. A RAM 403, which is a memory, is incorporated. The MPU 401 is electrically connected to an input/output port 404 and is also electrically connected via the input/output port 404 to a card reader 411 provided in a card insertion hole 410 . The input/output port 404 is connected to the MPU 401 in the decoding device 400 so as to be capable of inputting and outputting commands, and is also connected to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 outside the decoding device 400 so as to be capable of inputting and outputting commands. It is

The MPU 401 of the decoding device 400 demultiplexes the multiplexed command MECC received from the sub-controllers 111 and 113, executes various controls for decoding, and transmits the decoded control command CC at the transmission source. It executes control for sending (replying) to certain sub-controllers 111 and 113 .

The ROM 402 of the decoding device 400 stores various programs executed by the MPU 401, such as a program for demultiplexing the multiplexed command MECC, as well as various fixed value data.

The RAM 403 is provided with at least an encryption control command storage unit 403a, an encryption scramble key storage unit 403b, an encryption work key storage unit 403c, and a transmission command buffer 403d. The multiplexed command MECC transmitted from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is configured to be stored in a reception command buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 403 .

The encrypted control command storage unit 403a is an area for temporarily storing the encrypted control command ECC generated (extracted) when the multiplexed command MECC transmitted from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is demultiplexed. be. The encrypted control command ECC separated from the multiplexed command MECC in the decryption device 400 is stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 403a (see S3101 in FIG. 35), and then encrypted and scrambled in the decryption device 400. The control command CC is obtained (extracted and generated) by decryption with the scramble key Ks decrypted from the key EKs. The encrypted control command storage unit 403a storing the encrypted control command ECC is cleared after the encrypted control command ECC is decrypted and the control command CC is obtained (extracted or generated). (initialization) (see S3111 in FIG. 35).

In the first embodiment, the encrypted control command ECC separated from the multiplexed command MECC in the decryption device 400 is equivalent to the encrypted control command ECC encrypted with the scramble key Ks of the encryption device 300. and can be decrypted with a scramble key Ks, which is a common key (secret key) of the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 . Then, the control command CC is generated (obtained and extracted) by decrypting the encrypted control command ECC with the scramble key Ks in the decryption device 400 (see S3110 in FIG. 35). The encrypted control command ECC is encrypted except for the destination information, and is decrypted by the scramble key Ks.

The encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b is an area for temporarily storing the encrypted scramble key EKs generated (extracted) when the multiplexed command MECC transmitted from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is demultiplexed. be. The encrypted scramble key EKs separated from the multiplexed command MECC in the decryption device 400 is stored in this encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b (see S3101 in FIG. 35). The scramble key Ks is obtained (extracted or generated) by decrypting with the work key Kw decrypted from the key EKw. The encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b storing the encrypted scramble key EKs is cleared after the encrypted scramble key EKs is decrypted and the scramble key Ks is obtained (extracted or generated). (initialization) (see S3111 in FIG. 35).

In the first embodiment, the encrypted scramble key EKs separated from the multiplexed command MECC in the decryption device 400 is equivalent to the encrypted scramble key EKs encrypted with the work key Kw of the encryption device 300. It can be decrypted in the decryption device 400 from the encrypted work key EKw using the work key Kw decrypted with the master key Km of the authentication card 500 . Then, by decrypting the encrypted scramble key EKs with the work key Kw in the decryption device 400, the scramble key Ks is generated (obtained and extracted) (see S3109 in FIG. 35), and the decryption device 400 performs encryption control. It becomes possible to decode the command ECC.

The encrypted work key storage unit 403c is an area for temporarily storing the encrypted work key EKw generated (extracted) when the multiplexed command MECC transmitted from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is demultiplexed. be. The encrypted work key EKw separated from the multiplexed command MECC in the decryption device 400 is stored in this encrypted work key storage unit 403c (see S3101 in FIG. 35). The work key Kw is obtained (extracted and generated) by decrypting with the master key Km read from the regular authentication card 500 that was paired and issued at the time of manufacture. The encrypted work key storage unit 403c in which the encrypted work key EKw is stored is cleared after the encrypted work key EKw is decrypted and the work key Kw is obtained (extracted or generated). (initialization) (see S3111 in FIG. 35).

In the first embodiment, the encrypted work key EKw separated from the multiplexed command MECC in the decryption device 400 is equivalent to the encrypted work key EKw encrypted with the master key Km of the encryption device 300. It can be decrypted with the master key Km, which is the common key (secret key) of the encryption device 300 and the authentication card 500 . Then, by decrypting the encrypted work key EKw with the master key Km in the decryption device 400, the work key Kw is generated (obtained and extracted) (see S3106 in FIG. 35), and encrypted and scrambled in the decryption device 400. It becomes possible to decrypt the key EKs.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the process of decoding the control command CC based on the multiplexed command MECC, the information indicated by the work key Kw that is decoded first (first) and the card insertion hole 410 (FIG. 2) (see S3107 in FIG. 35), and the decryption device 400 decrypts If the information indicated by the received work key Kw matches the serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 501a of the authentication card 500 inserted in the card insertion hole 410, the subsequent decryption processing is executed. While the control command CC is generated in the decryption device 400, the information indicated by the work key Kw decrypted in the decryption device 400 and the information stored in the later-described serial number storage section 501a of the authentication card 500 inserted in the card insertion hole 410 are stored. If the serial number SN does not match, a mismatch command indicating that the pairing between the main controller 110 (pachinko machine 10) and the authentication card 500 is different (see S3108 in FIG. 35), and the control It is configured not to generate a command CC.

With this configuration, when the work key Kw generated from the serial number SN stored in the main controller 110 and the serial number SN stored in the authentication card 500 do not match, the control command CC is normally decrypted. By not performing the game control in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suggest to a person involved in the game hall or the player that the pairing (matching) between the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 is different. becomes.

The transmission command buffer 403e is an area for temporarily storing a command indicating the decoding result of the multiplexed command MECC transmitted from the sub-controllers 111 and 113. FIG. Commands stored in this transmission command buffer 403e (control command CC in the first embodiment, expired command or non-matching command to be described later) are transmitted to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 based on the destination information indicated by the command. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 17, the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400 is provided with a card reader 411 capable of reading various data stored in the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500 . This card reading unit 411 reads the later-described serial number storage unit 501a, master key storage unit 501b, or expiration date information stored in the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500 based on a reading instruction from the MPU 401 of the decryption device 400. Each information is read from the storage unit 501c and the read result is output to the MPU 401 via the input/output port 404. FIG.

The IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500 includes a serial number storage unit 501a storing the serial number SN, a master key storage unit 501b storing the master key Km, and an expiration date information storage storing the expiration date information ED. A portion 501c is provided. The serial number SN of the serial number storage unit 501a and the master key Km of the master key storage unit 501b are the serial number SN stored in the main controller 110 and the encryption device 300 when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. It is stored paired with the master key Km (corresponding information). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, expiration date information ED indicating the expiration date during which the authentication card 500 can be effectively read is stored in the expiration date information storage unit 501c. By storing the various information in the IC chip 501 of the authentication card 500 in this way, reading errors due to magnetic defects and fraudulent acts such as skimming can be suppressed compared to the case where the card is made with a magnetic stripe. becomes.

In the first embodiment, when the decryption device 400 receives the multiplexed command MECC, the card reader 411 reads the content of the authentication card 500 being inserted into the card insertion hole 410, and separates the multiplexed command MECC. used for encoding and decoding. Specifically, when the MPU 401 of the decryption device 400 receives the multiplexed command MECC from the sub-controllers 111 and 113, first, the validity period information ED stored in the validity period information storage section 501c of the authentication card 500 is within the expiration date (see S3104 in FIG. 35). If the expiration date information ED is within the expiration date, the subsequent decryption processing is executed. If so, the subsequent decoding process is not performed, and instead of generating the control command CC, an expired command is generated (see S3105 in FIG. 35) and transmitted to the sub-controllers 111 and 113. FIG.

Further, when the expiration date information ED is within the expiration date, the MPU 401 of the decryption device 400 then stores it in the encrypted work key storage unit 403c using the master key stored in the master key storage unit 501b of the authentication card 500. The encrypted work key EKw is decrypted (see S3106 in FIG. 35), and the decrypted work key Kw, that is, the work key Kw generated from the serial number SN stored in the main controller 110, and the authentication card 500 (S3107 in FIG. 35). If the decrypted work key Kw is consistent with the serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 501a of the authentication card 500, the pairing between the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 is normal. , while the subsequent decryption processing is executed, if the decrypted work key Kw and the serial number SN stored in the serial number storage unit 501a of the authentication card 500 do not match, that is, the pachinko machine 10 and If the pairing with the authentication card 500 does not match, the subsequent decryption process is not performed, and instead of generating the control command CC, a mismatch command is generated (see S3108 in FIG. 35), and the sub control device 111 and 113.

As described above, the encryption device 300 stores the scramble key Ks and the master key Km in advance, but the encryption device 300 cannot generate the work key Kw by itself. It is configured so that the work key Kw cannot be generated unless it can be obtained. Further, the decryption device 400 cannot generate any of the keys Ks, Kw, and Km by itself. can be acquired only after decrypting the encrypted scramble key EKs contained in the work key Kw with the work key Kw. The included encrypted work key EKw can only be obtained by decrypting it with the master key Km, and the master key Km cannot be generated unless the master key Km stored in the authentication card 500 can be obtained.

With this configuration, only when the pairing between the main controller 110 and the authentication card 500 does not match and when the control command CC is received via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, It is possible to execute game control based on the control command CC transmitted from the main control device 110 in the sub control devices 111 and 113 . That is, if any one of the main control device 110, the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400 and the authentication card 500 does not match, the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from executing the game normally. be able to. As a result, in the event of fraud or illegal resale, the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from playing a normal game, resulting in the disadvantage of the game hall due to the fraud and the situation that the game machine maker cannot manage. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. When the voice ramp controller 113 receives a multiplexed command output from the main controller 110 and indicating the pending pitch command encrypted and multiplexed by the encryption device 300, it decrypts the multiplexed command. By outputting to the device 400 and receiving the reserved ball number command (control command) normally decrypted by the decryption device 400 and the authentication card 500, the first special symbol or the first reserved symbol in the main controller 110 2 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time the start winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, the audio lamp control device 113 The number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) of each managed special symbol deviates from the actual number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is, the discrepancy can be corrected by the next pending pitches command received.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display pending ball number command for notifying the pending ball number to the display control device 114 every time the internally managed pending ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db of the third design display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the audio lamp control device 113 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, the pending ball number command includes 1 Not only the added value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b, but also the above-mentioned starting prize that triggered the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Along with this, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 9) is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is The number commands are passed through the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice ramp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the normally decoded pending ball number command is set to each value. Before execution of the variation performance based on it, it is determined what will happen to the variation performance (whether it will be a big win, what will happen to the variation time, etc.) before the execution of the variation performance. Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a pending ball number command indicating the pending ball number of the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like are separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the A command similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command (advance variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) based on the incoming ball may be generated and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64a. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64a (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the second start port 64b. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

The reserved ball execution area 203f, as described above, starts execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as target display and variable effect setting.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Data ( counters C1-C3, CS1), if the data corresponding to the start winning regarding the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, it corresponds to one start winning of the data. Data is shifted into this hold ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start winning with respect to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning with respect to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol is the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not suspended. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set target display and variable effect.

As described above, for the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effect, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (start winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the empty areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas). remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first starting port 64a that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (2nd reservation 1st to 4th areas). be. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the second starting port 64b that is older in terms of time is stored, and the second reserve first area stores the data to the second starting port 64b that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. there is

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. , the data stored in the second reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when the execution start timing of the variable effect comes, the MPU 201 stores no data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first reserved area, the data stored in the first reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 23), and a big win lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is changed to the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the first reserved ball storage area 203e It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. shift to Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the first holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the first holding ball storage area 203d stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

Next, the details of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203g and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203h will be described. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203g and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203h are used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the winning lottery for the normal symbols and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83.

The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203g is a memory for storing the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of the ball to the through gate 67. FIG. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern from the counter buffer 203c, and stores the normal pattern reserved ball. Store in area 203g. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203g has four reserved areas (normal pattern holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

The normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203h is a memory for storing data (the value of the normal pattern per counter C4) to be referred to in the normal symbol winning lottery and variable display processing that starts execution or is being executed. be.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal design, in order to execute the processing such as the setting of the normal design winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal design display device 83, the above-mentioned normal design reservation ball Of the data stored in the storage area 203g (value of counter C4 per normal pattern), one data is shifted to this normal pattern holding ball execution area 203h. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the normal symbol winning lottery and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83 use the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery. 203 g of normal figure reservation ball storage areas memorize|stores the value of counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the buffer 203c for counters by MPU201, when a ball|ball passes the through gate 67. FIG.

In addition, as described above, in the general pattern holding ball storage area 203g, the data obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (the value of the normal pattern counter C4) is stored up to 4 times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (normal drawing reservation 1st to 4th areas). In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored, and the data of the ball passing through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the first area of the normal map reservation area. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203h is composed of only one area. Similar to the general-pattern holding ball storage area 203g, the general-pattern holding ball execution area 203h is provided with a general-pattern random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the normal-pattern counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, the data stored in the first normal pattern reservation area of the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203g is transferred to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203h. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203h is referred to in the normal pattern variation process (see S111 in FIG. 20), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and variable display is performed. determine the content of In the normal symbol display device 83, under the control of the main controller 110, variable display is performed based on the determined contents.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of normal symbols, the random value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern in the first area of the normal pattern retention ball storage area 203g. is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern of the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203h.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203h is completed, the normal pattern holding first area becomes empty, so it is stored in each area (2nd to 4th) of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203g. Shift processing is performed to shift the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only for the general pattern reservation areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203g.

Here, the data shift performed with respect to each reservation area in the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203g will be described. For example, when the start determination of the variable display of normal symbols is made, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203g. Suppose there is In this state, the data of the normal pattern reservation first area is shifted to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203h, and when the normal pattern reservation first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (2nd to 4th) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. In other words, the data of the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 1st area of reservation of the general pattern, the data of the 3rd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern, and the data of the 4th area of the reservation of the general pattern. is shifted to the 3rd area for general map reservation.

Also, for example, if the number of reserved normal symbols is 2 when the start determination of the variable display of normal symbols is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second area reserved for normal symbols to the first area reserved for normal symbols. Shift to finish shifting data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general pattern reservation area (third to fourth) where data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the general map reservation area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (reserved) in the normal drawing reservation area (second to fourth), so it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected with at least the encryption device 300 , the special symbol display device 37 , the normal symbol display device 83 and the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 .

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected to the variable winning device 65, the ordinary electric circuit 64c, and other solenoids 209 for driving other driving devices (not shown). Various commands and control signals are sent to these via the

Further, the input/output port 205 is provided with the variable winning device 65 as a detection device, and consists of a group of switches (not shown) such as a large winning opening switch for detecting a ball that has won the variable winning device 65, and a group of sensors. Other switches 208 are connected to a later-described RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 performs various operations based on signals output from the various switches 208 and RAM erase signals output from the RAM erase switch 122. Execute the process.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. Furthermore, the payout control device 111 outputs a prize ball detection signal indicating the detection result of the prize balls detected by the prize ball detection switch 217, and a payout abnormality signal indicating the payout abnormality when an abnormal ball is paid out. It is configured to be able to output to main controller 110 . The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 . In addition, signals used for feedback control such as prize ball detection signals and payout abnormality signals output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110 are not encrypted by the encryption device 300, and are directly sent to the main control device 110. is entered for By configuring in this way, only the command for instructing the execution of the game is encrypted, and the signal for detecting whether the game is properly performed is not encrypted. It is possible to quickly verify the results.

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect and the "character selection" effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the first embodiment, a command is transmitted only in one direction from the encryption device 300 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the command is transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the encryption device 300 (main controller 110 side). It is configured so that it cannot be sent. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the decoding device 400 are configured to be able to transmit and receive commands to each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image of the "super reach" effect mode, etc., and to change the selected character in the "character selection" effect, and also to the display control device 114. The third symbol display device 81 is instructed to display the display based on the depression of the frame button 22 . That is, the control commands generated by the sound lamp control device 113 are not encrypted and multiplexed by the encryption device 300, nor are they separated and decrypted via the decryption device 400. It is output to the device 114 or the like.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10 and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

A detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d are stored as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, and the effect contents (and the execution time (timing)) is determined and control is executed.

The RAM 223 has at least a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-first reserve ball counter 223b, a sub-second reserve ball counter 223c, a first reserve information storage area 223d, a second reserve information storage area 223e, and an execution information storage area 223f. is provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation effect should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S2305 in FIG. 32). Then, it is turned off when the special symbol variation effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2402 in FIG. 33).

The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is triggered by the turning on of the fluctuation start flag 223a, and when there is a variable effect in standby, a variable effect process (Fig. 33).

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a first special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command (holding ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, The number of reserved balls is managed by the number of reserved balls counter 223b.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first start port 64a, and the main controller 110 counts the first reserved ball number counter 203a. When the value is added, when the first pending pitches command transmitted from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 is received, the main The value after the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the control device 110 (that is, the reserved ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved by the main control device 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b. do.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113, when the value of the first ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, the second Receive the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command corresponding to the variation performance of 1 special symbol, and set the mode of the variation performance of the 1st special symbol with the 3rd design display device 81 along with their reception. When doing so, 1 is subtracted (updated) from the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 sub-first reserved ball Since the value of the number counter 223b is updated, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a second special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command sent from the main control device 110 to the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, and the second pending ball counter 223c , to manage the number of pending balls.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls for the second special symbol variation effect by entering the second starting port 64b, and the main controller 110 counts the second pending ball number counter 203b. When the second pending pitches command transmitted from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 is received when the value is added, the main The value after addition of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the control device 110 (that is, the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variable effect reserved by the main control device 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c. do.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 is the second value transmitted from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110. Receive the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command corresponding to the variation performance of the 2 special symbols, and set the mode of the variation performance of the second special symbol with the third design display device 81 along with their reception. When doing so, 1 is subtracted (updated) from the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 Since the value of the number counter 223c is updated, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is used for the display of reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the sound lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored in the number counter 223c, or in response to receiving the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223c is updated, the display control device 114 displays the stored or updated values of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball counter 223c. , the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first number of the sound lamp control device 113 The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c and the execution patterns indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 6(b)). control the rendering of the image as it appears in ).

As described above, the sub first reserved ball counter 223b changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball counter 223c The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third pattern display device 81 is also determined by the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of 203b. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The first reserved information storage area 223d is information for performing a variable effect of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the first reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223d and each table 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223e is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the second reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the second different symbol transmitted by the number command.

Voice lamp control device 113, using the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223e, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, variation of the second special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The execution information storage area 223f is the information of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main controller 110 acquires from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning. , is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation production, in order to execute the setting of the variation production of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, etc., the above-described first reservation information storage Information (counters C1 to C3, CS1 etc. ) are shifted to this execution information storage area 223f.

Details of the first pending information storage area 223d, the second pending information storing area 223e, and the execution information storing area 223f will now be described. The first pending information storage area 223d has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. Each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information includes a jackpot random number counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. At least a stop pattern selection counter storage area in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored and a variation type counter storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223e has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223d. Each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information includes a jackpot random number counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. At least a stop pattern selection counter storage area in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored and a variation type counter storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223f, a jackpot random number counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed, and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area where the value of is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. is provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223f is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed.

In addition, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol variation performance in terms of time among the reserved first special symbol variation performances, and is the first suspension. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and the third area that stores the first suspension information. The area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is retained the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performance of the first special symbol that is retained, and the fourth area for storing the first retention information is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol retained fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the first special symbol held.

Further, the first area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation performance that is temporally first suspended among the suspended second special symbol variation performances, and is the second suspension. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended, and the third area that stores the second suspension information. The area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained, and the fourth area for storing the second retention information is reserved. It is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol retained fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol held.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type Each value of the counter CS1 and the corresponding special symbol are extracted from the reserved ball number command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 puts the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 in the corresponding first hold information storage first to fourth areas or second hold information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area, jackpot type counter storage area, stop pattern selection counter storage area, and variation type counter storage area of the area corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special The number of symbol fluctuation effects is X, and the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are retained at the X-th time of the suspended variable effects of the first special symbol. Since it corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to each counter storage area of the first reservation information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the first reserved 1st area X of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command that mean the start of variation performance from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, the first suspension information storage area 223d or the information stored in the second pending information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas of the second pending information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance are stored in the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. move to area. On the other hand, when there is no reserved information about the second special symbol, and only reserved information about the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the first storage information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol variation effect are It is moved to each storage area of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable effect.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas of the execution information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage number The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the 2 areas are moved to the respective storage areas of the second pending information storage first area, and transferred to the respective storage areas of the second pending information storage third area. The values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are moved to the respective storage areas of the second pending information storage second area, and the respective counters C1 to C stored in the respective storage areas of the second pending information storage fourth area The values of C3 and CS1 are moved to each storage area of the second hold information storage third area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage area 223f are moved to the respective storage areas of the execution information storage area 223f, the first pending information storage number The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the 2 areas are moved to the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage first area, and transferred to the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage third area. The values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are moved to the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage second area, and the respective counters C1 to C stored in the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage fourth area The values of C3 and CS1 are moved to each storage area of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 4 area, and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. 223f, the first pending information storage area 223d, and the second pending information storage area 223e.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing the above-described "holding change notice" or the like, the first special symbol and Grasp the number of variable effects of the second special symbol (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of holding balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended among the first to fourth areas storing the first suspension information and the first to fourth areas storing the second suspension information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined.

Specifically, for example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "0", the first special symbol variation effect Since the number of pending balls is 1 and the number of pending balls of the second special symbol variation effect is 0, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored for the first area storing the first pending information is read ahead and a judgment is made. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113 via the encryption device 300. The voice ramp controller 113 cannot access the RAM 203 and the like. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223d and the second reservation information storage area 223e, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223d and the second suspension information storage area 223e , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

In addition, the above-described shift processing in the first pending information storage area 223d or the second pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f is the number of pending balls (variation pattern Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c before being updated based on the reception of the command and the stop type command), the first reservation information storage first to fourth areas And the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the pending variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223d (first reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas) are stored. In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area 223f is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, the data in the second pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage area, and the first pending information The data in the third storage area is shifted to the second area for storing the first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing the first pending information.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reserved information storage first area is transferred to the execution information storage area. 223f, shifts the data in the first pending information storage second area to the first pending information storage first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the first pending information storage first to fourth areas or the second pending information storage first to fourth areas is stored in an area with an area number smaller by 1 (execution information storage area 223f or It may be configured to shift to the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

In addition, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 or commands received from the decryption device 400 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. It has a command storage area (not shown) etc. for storing data.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command reception processing (see FIG. 31) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command reception processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the special symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, It controls the continuous announcement effect such as “holding change announcement”.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 20 to 26. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing (see FIG. 24) that is started when the power is turned on, main processing (see FIG. 25) that is executed after the start-up processing, and periodic processing (see FIG. 25). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is activated at a "4 millisecond" period) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) will be described first, followed by the startup processing (see FIG. 24), main processing (see FIG. 25), and NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). explain.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every "4 milliseconds". The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, commands to be transmitted to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. via encryption device 300 and decryption device 400 are generated based on various processes, and stored in RAM 203. It is temporarily stored in the provided command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a pending ball number command set in the later-described start winning process (see FIG. 21). In addition, the variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure variation process (see FIG. 22) and the variation start process (FIG. 23) which is one process of the special figure variation process are encrypted and decrypted 400 to the audio lamp controller 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal set for shooting a ball in the launch control process of S112, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, and the payout control device 111. do.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of the big hit based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. (S103).

Next, a normal electric motor control process for executing drive control processing for the rotating plate of the normal electric motor 64c is executed (S104). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. symbol) appears and the winning state is established, the rotation plate of the ordinary electric member 64c is driven to open for a predetermined time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the state of the first starter switch, the second starter switch, the big prize-winning switch, and various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined to obtain the detection information. (winning detection information) is saved. Also, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 via the encryption device 300 and the decoding device 400 is sent to a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. set to As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal pattern per counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (first embodiment Then, when they reach "899", "99", "99", "199", and "99") respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the general figure per counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal pattern per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, the start winning process associated with the winning of the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is executed (S108), and then, as the ball passes through the through gate 67, whether the normal symbol is accepted or not and the variable display are displayed. A gate passing process for determining the contents etc. is executed (S109). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the gate passing process (S109), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S108). A special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S110). The details of the special figure variation processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S109), the normal pattern display device 83 performs a normal pattern variation process for performing a process for performing variable display of normal patterns (S111). In normal pattern variation processing (S111), the normal pattern lottery probability is either high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1/10) depending on the value of a time saving counter which will be described later.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S111), the firing control process is executed (S112), and further, other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process (S112) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400 and the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Next, the starting winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S108). The starting prize-winning process goes to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 64a and 64b"). It is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize, and if there is a prize, the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage corresponding to the winning start port 64a, 64b A process of storing (holding) in the area 203e is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball into the first starting port 64a, read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 20), A ball entering the 1 starting hole 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 20).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there has been a starting prize) (S201: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a) It is determined whether or not the number N1 of active balls in dynamic display (variation effect) of one special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a prize to the first start port 64a, if the number of balls N1<4 (S202: No) is not activated, the start prize processing (S108) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S202: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S204), and processing is performed. to S209.

In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64a (S201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S205). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64a, a second starting port switch (not shown) for detecting a ball entering (winning) into the second starting port 64b read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 20). Based on the output signal of , the ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S205: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of active balls in dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of 2 special symbols is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 64b (S205: No), or even if there is a winning to the second starting port 64b, if the number of balls to be activated is not N2<4 (S206: No), this The start winning process (S108) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second ball number counter 203b (the number N2 of balls held in operation) is incremented by 1 (S207). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S208), and processing is performed. to S209.

In the process of S209, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 9), and are set as storage destinations in S204 or S208. Among the first holding first to fourth areas or second holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e, the first holding ball storage area 203d is If specified as a storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S209). Also, when the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b is the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and the stop They are reserved (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S209).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S204 based on the winning to the first starting port 64a, and the number of the first reserved balls after addition by the processing of S203 If the value of the counter 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S208 based on the winning to the second starting port 64b, and the number of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the processing of S207 If the value is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3, respectively , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first retained ball number counter 203a or the second retained ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S203 or S207 (the number of activated retained balls N1 or the number of activated retained balls N2), and the first A held ball number command containing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e is voiced. In order to transmit it to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball count command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, by the external output processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) executed next, the pending ball number command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400. sent. After completing the process of S210, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command in the process of S210 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S209. A read value stored (retained) in the ball storage area 203d or the second retained ball storage area 203e may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special figure variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S110). This special figure variation processing (S110) is to control the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 and the variation performance performed in the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this special figure variation process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the middle of a big hit (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot (S301: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S110) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is returned to.

If it is not during the jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is during dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is during dynamic display. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. .

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (second special It is determined whether or not the number N2 of balls to be activated for dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding symbols is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operational reserved balls N2) (S305). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the suspended dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started by the fluctuation start process (S310) described later, and the second This is because the number of reserved balls related to special symbols is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 area→reserved ball execution area 203f, 2nd reservation 2nd area→2nd reservation 1st area, 2nd reservation 3rd area→2nd reservation 2nd area, 2nd reservation 4th area→2nd reservation 3rd area In this way, the data within each area is shifted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S304, if it is determined that the value of the second ball holding counter 203b (the number of ball holding in operation N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first ball ball counter 203a (actuation suspension ball number N1 of dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol suspended in main controller 110) is greater than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) (S308). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the reserved first special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S310) to be described later. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S309). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 area→holding ball execution area 203f, 1st holding 2nd area→1st holding 1st area, 1st holding 3rd area→1st holding 2nd area, 1st holding 4th area→1st holding 3rd area In this way, the data within each area is shifted.

After the data shift process of S306 or S309, the variation start process for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process. (S310) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). Note that the fluctuation start process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first ball number counter 203a (the number of balls in operation and ball N1) is "0" (S307: No), the third symbol display device 81 performs a demonstration effect. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S311). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a or the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N1 or The period until it is determined that any value of the number of held balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S311: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S311: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the stop of the variation, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

If it is determined in the process of S311 that the demonstration is not being performed (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is added. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S312 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S313 ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If the (fluctuation time) has not passed (S313: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 20).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the display mode of the special LED group 37b is set until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display is started.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S313: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol. (S315). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S310), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, it is determined whether or not a big win is made according to the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S306 or S309. Thus, the number of rounds at the time of the big win and the game state that can occur after the big win are determined.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S316), and the process proceeds to S317 in order to synchronize and display the confirmation. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . Upon receiving this confirmation command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopped symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether or not the game state to which the "time saving function" is added, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0". Determine (S317). This time-saving counter is set to "10000" when the jackpot type "variable probability A" or "variable probability B" is determined in the jackpot process, and "100" is set when the jackpot type "shortening time A" is determined. and "50" is set when the jackpot type "time saving B" is determined. In addition, when the jackpot type "probability variable A" or "probability variable B" is determined, instead of the number of times, the "time saving function" may be set to be effective until the next big hit occurs.

In the processing of S317, if the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), it is a game state in which the "time saving function" is added, and dynamic display (variation effect) of any special symbol is performed. Since it ended once, the value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (S318), this special figure fluctuation processing (S110) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is returned to. Here, by the processing of S318, when the value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the game state is changed from the "time shortening state" to the "normal game state", and the sound lamp control device 113 etc. A game state command is transmitted indicating that the game state changes (such as ending the "time reduction state" and changing to the "normal game state"). On the other hand, in the process of S317, if the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S317: No), since the "time saving function" is not added, the process of S318 is skipped, and this special figure variation process (S110 ) and return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The game state command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed next, the game state command is transmitted to the encryption device 300. and transmitted to the audio ramp controller 113 via the decoder 400 . Upon receiving the game state command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a game state command for display based thereon and transmits it to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the variation start process (S310), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S310). In this fluctuation start process (S310), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, a lottery for a big hit or a loss (big hit lottery) is performed, and the special symbol display device 37 and the second A dynamic display and a dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of dynamic display and variation production performed by the 3-symbol display device 81 are determined.

In the variation start process (S310), first, in order to determine the game state, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, the "probability change state" (S321). As a result of the determination, if it is not in the "probability fluctuation state" (S321: No), the game state is the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is a low probability state. A jackpot random number table 202a for the probability state is set (S322), and the process proceeds to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined to be in the "probability fluctuation state" (S323: Yes), since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323). , the process proceeds to S324.

In the process of S324, it is determined whether or not a big win is made based on the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the big win random number table 202a (see FIG. 10) set in S322 or S323. A jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) process is performed (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big win random number counter C1 and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state ("normal game state" or "time reduction state"), "7,307 , 582” is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state ("probability fluctuation state"), "28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866" is a big hit. Specified as a random value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that As a result of the processing of S324, when it is determined that the jackpot is hit (S324: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol Based on the type table 202b1 (see FIG. 11(a)) or the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 11(b)) corresponding to the second special symbol, the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set (S325 ).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the maximum number of rounds is "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 10 rounds. "Probability A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "Probability variation B" corresponding to "4R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "probability variation state" after the maximum number of rounds hits 4 rounds, or maximum round "Time reduction A" corresponding to "10R time reduction jackpot" where the number shifts to "time reduction state" after 10 rounds of jackpot, or "4R time reduction jackpot" where the maximum number of rounds shifts to "time reduction state" after 4 rounds of jackpot It is determined whether it is "time saving B" corresponding to ". Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f And, the jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 11(a)). In addition, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 for FIG. 2 (see FIG. 11(b)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, a rough effect mode is selected, and the selected Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, a dynamic time (fluctuation time) of a specific dynamic display (fluctuation performance) is determined from among rough performance modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the big win type (display mode).

Specifically, for example, when "variable probability A" corresponding to "10R variable probability jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the process of S325, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "variable probability A" (for example, variable probability In the stop pattern table for A), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Also, when "variable probability B" corresponding to "4R variable probability big hit" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the stop pattern table for variable probability B) provided for "variable probability B" is reserved. A performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. Also, when "time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, time saving A stop pattern table) provided for "time saving A" is reserved. A performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. Also, when "time saving B" corresponding to "4R time saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "time saving B" (for example, the stop pattern table for time saving B) is reserved. A performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected.

Then, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S326, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f is selected. . Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S324 that it is not a big hit (S324: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S327). In the processing of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203f and the first retained ball number counter are set. 203a or (and) based on the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current game state, as the effect mode to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, "non-reach (short)" effect mode, "non-reach (Long)" effect mode, "normal reach" effect mode, "super reach" effect mode, or "special reach" effect mode is set.

In the first embodiment, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability change state", "time reduction state", or "normal game state", stop corresponding to each effect mode The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value ranges of the pattern selection counter C3 are different.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (performance mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S327 Select the variation pattern associated with Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win and the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. , the program can be shared, and the number of man-hours required for development can be reduced.

In the processing of S329, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S326 and S328, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern is determined via the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, and the audio ramp control device 113. A variation pattern command for notifying the time to the display control device 114 is set (S329). Specifically, for example, winning a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is "variable probability A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", and furthermore, the variation pattern of "25 seconds" "super reach" is selected. In this case, a variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of jackpot, "probability variation A", and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the variation pattern of ``25 seconds'' and ``super reach'' is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the failure and ``25 seconds'' of ``super reach'' is set. . In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in more detail based on the information.

Also, a stop type command is set for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S325 or S327 via the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, and the sound lamp control device 113 (S330 ), and returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 25). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "10R probability variable jackpot" "probable variable A", a specific third pattern stop mode (for example, "7" pattern etc.) does not specify, but sets a stop type command indicating "probability variation A". In addition, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "time saving B" that is "4R time saving jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third pattern (for example, "4" pattern etc.) is not specified. , and sets a stop type command indicating that it is “time saving B”.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the " Set a stop type command indicating that it is in the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is not specified, and the "normal reach" at the time of losing is selected. ” Set a stop type command indicating that the mode is the rendering mode. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" production mode.

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the result of stopping the variable presentation in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed next, these commands are After being multiplexed in the encryption device 300 , it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 . When receiving the multiplexing command, the audio ramp control device 113 first transmits the multiplexing command to the decoding device 400, and receives the decoded variation pattern command and stop type command from the decoding device 400. Based on this, a display variation pattern command and a display type command are generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing ( In the first embodiment, "1 second") is executed (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is turned on (S704), and if it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705), and if not stored (S705: No) , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S711.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will also be described in S806 of FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S711, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S711). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S712, S713).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S712, S713). Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S712, S713) is executed in the same way. . In the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S712, S713), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S712), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S713). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S707: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S708). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S709), and the process proceeds to S710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes possible to start the ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S710, interrupts are permitted (S710). Thereafter, a serial number command indicating the serial number SN (see FIG. 18) stored in the serial number storage unit 202j of the ROM 202 is transmitted to the encryption device 300 (S714). Upon receiving the serial number command, the encryption device 300 generates a work key Kw based on the serial number SN indicated by the serial number command (see S1002 in FIG. 27), and stores the work key Kw in the work key storage unit 303a. (see S1003 in FIG. 27). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 25), which will be described later. In this way, every time the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 110) is powered on, the data regarding the serial number SN is transmitted to the encryption device 300, and the encryption device 300 receives the serial number SN. By generating a work key Kw to be used when encrypting a control command by using the power-off, if the main controller 110 is illegally exchanged while the power is off, the game after the illegal action cannot be executed normally. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S801: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S802). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" and "99" in the first embodiment) , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 20) (S923), and the process proceeds to S921.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 20 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals ("4 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 is performed, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control regarding the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. . Also, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S802 and S803, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal figure per counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, random can be sexualized.

In addition, in the process of S801, if information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S801: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, is executed, so the power-off process after S804 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S804), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S805). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S806), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S807), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S801 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S802 and S803 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) are finished, and at the timing when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, power-off generation information is confirmed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S801 after the start-up process (see FIG. 24) ends. That is, the process can be started from the process of S801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S701). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S801 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) executes the processing to be periodically executed, and the main processing (see FIG. 25) sets each counter to the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). Although the case of updating CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 has been described, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) can be performed in the main processing (see FIG. 25). It may be configured to run every time (eg, "4 milliseconds"). For example, in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) was executed in the prize ball counting signal, payout abnormality signal reading processing (S102), jackpot processing (S103), ordinary electric role control processing (S104) And switch reading process (S105), start winning process (S108), gate passing process (S109), special figure fluctuation process (S110), normal figure fluctuation process (S111), some or all of the launch control process (S112) , not in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), but in the main process (see FIG. 25) every 4 milliseconds.

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see FIG. 25) to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time ("4 milliseconds") has elapsed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power failure occurrence information settings (S901). ), ending the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

On the other hand, the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 are not provided with a so-called backup function, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the content held until then is cleared, and each time the power is turned on, initialization is performed. It is configured to stand up from the state. In particular, the encryption device 300 generates a work key Kw used when encrypting control commands based on the serial number SN stored in the main controller 110, and the work key Kw is retained even after the power is turned off. Otherwise, for example, when the main controller 110 is illegally replaced while the power is off, it becomes possible to encrypt the control command with the backed up work key Kw. Therefore, the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 used for encrypting and decrypting the control commands are initialized each time the power is turned on and off, and the work key Kw is renewed, and the production number SN is sent from the main controller 110. Configure to get and generate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts based on the work key Kw being backed up.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 301 in the encryption device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. The processing of the MPU 301 is roughly divided into main processing (see FIG. 27) and encryption and multiplexing processing (see FIG. 28) executed in the main processing. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 301 in the encryption device 300. FIG. In the encryption device 300, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, start-up processing such as initial setting processing is executed. is configured to

In the main process of the encryption device 300, first, it is determined whether or not a serial number command indicating the serial number SN has been received from the main controller 110 (S1001). If no serial number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1001: No), the process of S1001 is repeated and the processes after S1002 are not executed. That is, in the main processing executed after the start-up processing performed when the power of the encryption device 300 is turned on, unless the serial number command is received from the main controller 110, the subsequent encryption processing of the control command CC cannot be executed. configured so that it cannot.

In the processing of S1001, if it is determined that a serial number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1001: Yes), a work key Kw is generated based on the serial number SN included in the serial number command (S1002). , the work key Kw is stored in the work key storage unit 303a (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1004.

With this configuration, unless the encryption device 300 generates a work key Kw based on the serial number SN included in the serial number command transmitted from the authorized main controller 110, the encryption and Since the multiplexing process cannot be executed, the main controller is replaced with an unauthorized main controller, and the encryption device 300 is made to store the unauthorized work key Kw. Kw), it is possible to prevent the execution of a game by unauthorized authentication based on the memorization of Kw).

In the process of S1004, it is determined whether or not the control command CC has been received from the main controller 110 (S1004). As a result of determination, if a control command CC has been received from the main controller 110 (S1004: Yes), encryption and multiplexing processing for encrypting and multiplexing the control command CC is performed (S1005), and then , the process proceeds to S1004, and the processes of S1004 to S1007 are repeatedly executed. Details of the encryption and multiplexing process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1004, if the control command CC has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1004: No), then it is determined whether the multiplexed command MECC is stored (stored) in the multiplexed command storage unit 303e. It is determined (S1006). As a result of determination, when the multiplexed command MECC is not stored in the multiplexed command storage unit 303e (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1004, and the processes of S1004 to S1007 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, if the multiplexed command MECC is stored in the multiplexed command storage unit 303e (S1006: Yes), based on the destination information, which is the non-encrypted portion of the multiplexed command MECC, the A multiplexing command MECC is transmitted to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 (S1007). After executing the process of S1007, the process proceeds to S1004, and the processes of S1004 to S1007 are repeatedly executed.

Next, the encryption and multiplexing process (S1005), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 301 in the encryption device 300, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this encryption and multiplexing process (S1005). As described above, this encryption and multiplexing process (S1005) is executed when the control command CC is received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the encryption and multiplexing process (S1005), first, the portion other than the destination information in the control command CC is encrypted with the scramble key Ks stored in the scramble key storage unit 302a to generate the encrypted control command ECC. The encrypted control command ECC is stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 303b (S1101).

Next, the scramble key Ks is encrypted with the work key Kw stored in the work key storage unit 303a to generate the encrypted scramble key EKs, and the encrypted scramble key EKs is stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c. (S1102).

Next, the work key Kw stored in the work key storage unit 303a is encrypted with the master key Km stored in the master key storage unit 302b to generate an encrypted work key EKw, and the encrypted work key EKw is encrypted. stored in the encrypted work key storage unit 303d (S1103).

Then, for the encrypted control command ECC generated in the process of S1101 and stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 303b, the encrypted control command ECC generated in the process of S1102 and stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c is generated. The encrypted scramble key EKs and the encrypted work key EKw generated in the process of S1103 and stored in the encrypted work key storage unit 303d are embedded and multiplexed to generate a multiplexed command MECC (S1104). The multiplexed command MECC is stored in the multiplexed command storage unit 303e (S1105).

After the processing of S1105, the encrypted control command ECC stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 303b, the encrypted scramble key EKs stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c, and the encrypted work key storage unit 303d (S1106), and the encryption and multiplexing process (S1005) ends. After the end of the encryption and multiplexing process (S1005), the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 27).

In this way, the encrypted control command storage unit 303b, the encrypted scramble key storage unit 303c, and the encrypted work key storage unit 303d are cleared each time the multiplexed command MECC is generated based on the reception of one control command CC. Thus, when generating the multiplexed command MECC based on the control command CC received next, the information based on the previously received control command CC can be erased. Therefore, it is possible to reliably generate a multiplexed command MECC corresponding only to each control command CC each time the control command CC is received.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 29) started upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 30) executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 29, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2115 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110, it executes power-off processing in S2115. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2115. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2115 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2115, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2116 is executed (see S2115 in FIG. 30). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2116 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S2009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), skipping S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, proceeds to S2010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), and sets interrupt permission. (S2011), and shifts to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the processing of S2101 was executed last time (S2101), and if "1 millisecond or more" has not passed ( S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2110 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2109. In the processing of S2101, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed because S2102 to S2109 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond"), whereas S2110 This is because the fluctuation effect processing and the command reception processing of S2111 are preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of S2110 in a short period, the command received by the command reception process Based on this, it is possible to transmit a multiplexing command to the decoding device 400 and to make settings related to the variable effect based on the control command received from the decoding device 400 without delay.

In the process of S2101, when it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S2101 was last executed (S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to S2102. If the process of S2101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 29, the process proceeds directly to S2102.

In the processing of S2102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2107, which will be described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). . The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on. 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S2105, a jackpot effect process for executing a jackpot-related effect set by the command reception process of S2111 (command determination process of S2206), which will be described later, is performed (S2105), and the process proceeds to the process of S2106.

Next, in the processing of S2116, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2116). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and during the valid period, the frame button is pressed. This is processing for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400, it is synchronized with the time required for the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81. Time is set. The lamp editing process of S2107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S2108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S2110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, variation is performed based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400. Variation production processing, which is processing for starting production, is executed. Then, after the variation effect processing, a command (that is, a multiplexed command) received from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 or a command for performing processing according to the control command received from the decryption device 400 is received. Processing is performed (S2111), and the process proceeds to S2112. The details of this command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S2112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2112). For example, the update of the counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect is performed in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment) and resetting it to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

After the processing of S2112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off processing is executed (S2116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command reception process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this command reception process (S2111). This command reception processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the encryption device 300 or the decryption device 400, or , determines the command received from the display control device 114 and executes processing based on the command.

In the command reception process (S21111), first, whether a command other than the multiplexing command MECC, such as an encryption control command ECC before multiplexing, is received from the encryption device 300 in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether or not (S2201). As a result of determination, if a command other than the multiplexing command MECC has not been received (S2201: No), the process of S2202 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2203. On the other hand, if a command other than the multiplexed command MECC has been received (S2201: Yes), it is an abnormal command that is not received from the encryption device 300 under normal conditions. , in the third symbol display device 81, an abnormality notification is executed to suggest to the game hall or the player that the command reception abnormality has occurred (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2203.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the control command CC transmitted from the main control device 110 is always encrypted and multiplexed via the encryption device 300 in the sound ramp control device 113 (similar to the payout control device 111). Therefore, when a command other than the multiplexing command MECC is received from the encryption device 300 (main control device 110 side), the encryption device 300 or the main There is a possibility that some abnormality (wiring abnormality, encryption or multiplexing processing abnormality, unauthorized replacement of the encryption device 300, etc.) has occurred in the control device 110 . Therefore, when a command other than the multiplexing command MECC is received from the encryption device 300, the command reception abnormality occurs in the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to detect the above-mentioned abnormal state at an early stage by executing the abnormal notification suggested to the player.

Next, in the process of S2203, it is determined whether or not the multiplexing command MECC has been received from the encryption device 300 (S2203). As a result of determination, when the multiplexing command MECC has not been received from the encryption device 300 (S2203: No), the process of S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if the multiplexed command MECC has been received from the encryption device 300 (S2203: Yes), the multiplexed command MECC is transmitted to the decryption device 400 (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

Upon receiving the multiplexed command MECC, the decryption device 400 uses the master key Km stored in the authentication card 500 to perform each process related to demultiplexing and decryption of the multiplexed command MECC. The processing for demultiplexing and decoding the multiplexed command MECC in decoding device 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG.

Next, in the processing of S2205, it is determined whether or not the control command CC obtained by decoding the multiplexed command MECC has been received from the decoding device 400 (S2205). As a result of determination, if the control command CC has not been received from the decoding device 400 (S2205: No), the process of S2206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, if the control command CC has been received from the decoding device 400 (S2205: Yes), the command determination process of determining the content of the control command CC and executing various controls based on the control command CC is performed ( S2206), and the process proceeds to S2207.

In the process of S2207, various processes are executed based on other received commands (for example, commands received from the display control device 114) (S2207), the command reception process (S2111) is terminated, and the main process (FIG. 30 ).

Here, the command determination processing (S2206) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2206). This command determination process (S2206) is executed in the command reception process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. A control command CC received via the decoding device 400 is determined.

In the command determination process (S2206), first, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the decoding device 400 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S2301). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S2301: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (2302).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 33) described later, a display variation pattern for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type to the display control device 114. Used to set commands. After that, the command determination processing (S2206) is terminated, and the command reception processing (see FIG. 31) is returned to.

If it is determined in the process of S2301 that no variation pattern command has been received (S2301: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the decoding device 400 (S2303). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2303: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S2303).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and when setting a display stop type command for notifying the stop type of the variable effect to the display control device 114 in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 33) described later. used for After that, the variable start flag 223a indicating that the variable effect is started is set to ON (S2305), the command determination process (S2206) is terminated, and the command reception process (see FIG. 31) is returned to.

The stop type command is a variation whose variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 when starting the variation effect. This is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 as a command indicating the stop type of the effect. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S23051, in the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 33) to be executed later, extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance received matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance extracted from the received variation pattern command. In addition, whether or not the variable effect stop type extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command matches the variable effect stop type extracted from the received stop type command judgment is made. As a result of those determinations, in one variation production, if the variation pattern based on the number of pending balls command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the number of pending balls command If it does not match the stop type based on the above, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

As a result of the processing of S2303, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2303: No), then whether a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400? It is determined whether or not (S2306). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S2306: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the reception of the confirmation command is set to the display control device 114 (S2307), and this command determination processing is executed. (S2206) is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception process (see FIG. 31).

As a result of the process of S2306, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S2306: No), then the command that has not been successfully decrypted from the decryption device 400, for example, the encrypted control command ECC remains unchanged. determines whether or not a command has been received (S2308). As a result of determination, if a command that has not been decoded normally is received from the decoding device 400 (S2308: Yes), it is an abnormal command that is not normally received from the decoding device 400. In the output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third pattern display device 81, an abnormality notification is executed to suggest to the game hall or the player that the command reception abnormality has occurred (S2202), and this command determination processing (S2206) is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception process (see FIG. 31).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the control command CC received from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 in the sound ramp control device 113 (similar to the payout control device 111) is When the pairing between the device 10 and the authentication card 500 is normal (normal), the multiplexed command MECC is always demultiplexed and decoded in the decoding device 400 before being received. Therefore, if a command that has not been decrypted normally is received from the decryption device 400, some abnormality (wiring abnormality, separation or decryption abnormality, unauthorized replacement of the decryption device 400, authentication card 500 failure (eg, card reading error) may have occurred. Therefore, when a command that has not been decoded normally is received from the decoding device 400, the occurrence of command reception abnormality is detected in the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third pattern display device 81. By executing the abnormality notification suggesting to the game hall and the player, it becomes possible to detect the abnormal state at an early stage.

In the process of S2310, various processes corresponding to other control commands CC are performed (S2310), the command determination process (S2206) ends, and the process returns to the command reception process (see FIG. 31).

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation effect processing (S2110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S2110). This variation production process (S2110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and various processes for executing the variation production in the third symbol display device 81 are executed.

In the fluctuation effect process (S2110), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, off) (S2401: No), at least a stop type command is sent from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400. Since it is in the state of not receiving, this fluctuation effect processing (S2110) is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S2401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation effect. (S2402), then, it is determined whether or not data relating to the variable effect is stored in the second reservation information storage area 223e (S2403). As a result of determination, if the data related to the variation performance is stored in the second pending information storage area 223e (S2403: Yes), it is included in the second pending information storage first area provided in the second pending information storage area 223e The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f (S2404). Then, the data contained in the second pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second pending information storage area 223e are shifted to the second pending information storage first to third areas (S2405). 1 is subtracted from the value of the 2-hold ball number counter 223c (S2406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas of the second pending information first area corresponding to the variable effect that has been executed are stored in the respective storage areas of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable effect being executed. move to Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas of the second pending information storage first area to store the second pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas of the third area are moved to the storage areas of the second pending information storage second area, and the storage areas of the second pending information storage fourth area to each storage area of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. - 4th area stores the same value as each of the counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the 2nd reserved 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 become.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2403, if it is determined that the data related to the variation performance is not stored in the second reservation information storage area 223e (S2403: No), the variation performance to be executed this time is related to the first special symbol. Therefore, the data contained in the first suspended information storage area provided in the first suspended information storage area 223d is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f (S2407). Further, the data contained in the first pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223d are shifted to the first pending information storage first to third areas (S2408), 1 is subtracted from the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (S2409), and the process proceeds to S2410.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the first pending information first area corresponding to the variable performance that has been executed are stored in the respective storage areas of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable performance being executed. move to Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas of the first pending information storage first area to store the first pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas of the third area are moved to the storage areas of the first pending information storage second area, and the storage areas of the first pending information storage fourth area The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in are moved to respective storage areas of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. The to fourth areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the first to fourth areas in the first to fourth area 203d of the main controller 110. become.

Next, in the process of S2410, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c updated in the process of S2406 or S2409 and the hold change information stored in the hold display information storage area are stored. A display reserved ball number command for notification to the display control device 114 is set (S2410), and the process proceeds to S2411.

The display pending ball number command set in S2410 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and encrypted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S2102 in FIG. 30). It is directly transmitted without going through the encoding device 300 and the decoding device 400 . As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the command for the number of reserved balls for display executes processing to display the reserved symbols and the execution symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81, and the reserved symbols and When displaying the executed symbols, display control is performed so that the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are displayed in the display mode of the determined "suspended change notice".

In the process of S2411, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f, the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation performance is performed in the third symbol display device 81. For display, a display variation pattern command is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S2411), and the process proceeds to S2412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and encrypted for the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S2102 in FIG. 30). It is transmitted directly without going through the device 300 and the decoding device 400 . The display control device 114 starts the display control of the variation effect so that the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S2412, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f, the stop type of the variable production to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type of the acquired variable production is acquired. Based on this, a stop type command for display is set (S2412), this variation effect processing (S2110) is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to.

The stop type command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and encrypted for the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S2102 in FIG. 30). It is transmitted directly without going through the device 300 and the decoding device 400 . The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1411 is to be displayed. do.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the decoding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. The processing of the MPU 401 is roughly divided into main processing (see FIG. 34) and separation and decoding processing (see FIG. 35) executed in the main processing. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by MPU 401 in decoding device 400 . In the decryption device 400, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a start-up process such as an initial setting process is executed, and after the start-up process is completed, the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed. is configured to

In the main processing in the decoding device 400, first, it is determined whether or not the multiplexing command MECC has been received from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 (S3001). As a result of determination, if the multiplexing command MECC has been received from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 (S3001: Yes), demultiplexing and decoding processing for demultiplexing and decoding the multiplexing command MECC is performed (S3002). ), the process then proceeds to S3001, and the processes of S3001 to S30004 are repeatedly executed. Details of the separation and decoding process (S3002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3001, if the multiplexing command MECC has not been received from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 (S3001: No), then it is determined whether or not the command is stored in the transmission command buffer 403d. (S3003). As a result of determination, if no command is stored in the transmission command buffer 403d (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3001, and the processes of S3001 to S30004 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, if the command is stored in the transmission command buffer 403d (S3003: Yes), the command is transmitted to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 based on the destination information of the command ( S3004). After executing the process of S3004, the process proceeds to S3001, and the processes of S3001 to S3004 are repeatedly executed.

Next, the separation and decoding process (S3002), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 401 in the decoding device 400, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this separation and decoding process (S3002). As described above, this demultiplexing and decoding process (S3002) is executed when the multiplexing command MECC is received from sub-controllers 111 and 113. FIG.

In the separation and decryption process (S3002), first, the multiplexed command MECC received from the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is converted into an encrypted control command ECC, an encrypted scramble key EKs, and an encrypted work key EKw according to a predetermined procedure. The encrypted control command ECC is stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 403a, the encrypted scramble key EKs in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b, and the encrypted work key EKw in the encrypted work key storage unit 403c. Store (S3101), and proceed to S3102.

Next, in the process of S3102, it is determined whether or not the authentication card 500 is inserted into the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400 (S3102). Here, if the authentication card 500 is not inserted into the card insertion hole 410 (S3102: No), at least the encrypted encrypted work key EKw cannot be decrypted. is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3111.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, if the authentication card 500 is inserted into the card insertion hole 410 (S3102: Yes), first, the serial number SN, the master key Km and the valid The expiration date information ED is read (S3103), and it is determined whether or not the expiration date information ED read from the authentication card 500 is within the expiration date (S3104). As a result of determination, if the expiration date information ED read from the authentication card 500 is not within the expiration date, that is, if it exceeds the expiration date set when the authentication card 500 is issued (S3104: No), the card insertion hole is opened. Without decrypting the control command CC by the authentication card 500 inserted in the 410 (skipping S3106 to S3110), an expired command indicating that the validity period of the authentication card 500 has expired is sent to the transmission command buffer 403d. After setting (S3105), the process proceeds to S3111. The expired command set in the transmission command buffer 403d in the processing of S3105 is sent to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 in the command transmission processing of the main processing (S3004 in FIG. 34), regardless of the destination information. sent.

The payout control device 111 or the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to recognize that the validity period of the authentication card 500 has expired and limit (stop, regulate) the processing related to the game when receiving the expiration command. . Specifically, for example, the payout control device 111 stops the operation of the payout motor 216 and stops the detection of the prize ball detection switch 217 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third pattern display device 81 execute abnormality notification suggesting to the game hall or the player that the expiration date has expired. do. In this way, when the expiration date of the authentication card 500 has expired, by transmitting the expiration command to the other sub-controllers 111 and 113 including the sub-controllers 111 and 113 which are the transmission sources, the pachinko It is possible to not only prevent normal execution of games on the machine 10, but also notify that the validity period of the authentication card 500 has expired.

By configuring in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, if the validity of the authentication card 500 issued by the game machine maker in pair with the pachinko machine 10 is lost, the encryption is performed. By not generating the control command CC without decrypting the encrypted control command ECC, it is possible to make it impossible to play a normal game with the expired authentication card 500.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game machine maker manages the distribution mode of the pachinko machine 10 and suppresses the occurrence of a situation where the pachinko machine 10 cannot be managed by preventing the normal game from being played on the pachinko machine 10 whose installation period has expired. be able to.

In the process of S3104, if it is determined that the expiration date information ED read from the authentication card 500 is within the expiration date (S3104: Yes), then the encrypted work key stored in the encrypted work key storage unit 403c EKw is decrypted with the master key Km read from the authentication card 500, and the work key Kw is acquired (extracted or generated) (S3105). Then, it is determined whether or not the decrypted work key Kw matches the serial number SN read from the authentication card 500 (S3107).

As described above, the decrypted work key Kw is generated from the serial number SN stored in the main controller 110, and the serial number SN stored in the regular authentication card 500 is the main controller It is set to be equal (identical) to the serial number SN stored in 110 . Therefore, if the decrypted work key Kw and the serial number SN read from the authentication card 500 do not match (S3107: No), the corresponding relationship between the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 is inconsistent. In this case also, the control command CC is not decrypted by the authentication card 500 inserted in the card insertion hole 410 (skipping the processing of S3109 and S3110), and the consistency between the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 is confirmed. A mismatched command indicating that it has not been received is set in the transmission command buffer 403d (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3111. The unmatched command set in the transmission command buffer 403d in the processing of S3108 is sent to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 in the command transmission processing of the main processing (S3004 in FIG. 34), regardless of the destination information. sent.

When the payout control device 111 or the voice lamp control device 113 receives the mismatch command, it recognizes that the authentication between the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 does not match, and similar to the case of receiving the expiration command, it is related to the game. It is configured to restrict (stop, regulate) processing. Specifically, for example, the payout control device 111 stops the operation of the payout motor 216 and stops the detection of the prize ball detection switch 217 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third pattern display device 81 execute abnormality notification suggesting to the game hall or the player that the expiration date has expired. do. In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 are not matched, a mismatch command is also transmitted to the other sub-controllers 111 and 113 including the sub-controllers 111 and 113 which are the transmission sources. By doing so, the pachinko machine 10 is not allowed to play the game normally, and it is possible to notify that the authentication card 500 has expired.

By configuring in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, if the authentication card 500 issued by the game machine maker as a pair (pair) with the pachinko machine 10 does not correspond to the pachinko machine 10, encryption is performed. A normal game cannot be played in the pachinko machine 10 when the combination of the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 does not match by not decrypting the encoded control command ECC and generating the control command CC. can be made Therefore, when the main control device 110 is modified by fraudulent acts, or when illegal resale to a sales destination unintended by the game machine maker is performed, the authentication card 500 legally issued by the game machine maker can be used. is not inserted into the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation performance or the like in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, if the game machine maker does not intend to cheat or illegally resell the game, by preventing the normal game from being played on the pachinko machine 10, the game hall will not suffer any disadvantages due to the cheating. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be managed by the manufacturer.

Also, in the decryption processing of the multiplexed command MECC, it is determined whether or not the work key Kw to be decrypted first matches, and if it is determined that they do not match, the subsequent decryption processing is not performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the control command CC from being decrypted, and to reduce the processing load.

In the process of S3107, if the decrypted work key Kw matches the serial number SN read from the authentication card 500 (S3107: Yes), the pairing between the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 is proper. Therefore, the encrypted scramble key EKs stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b is decrypted with the work key Kw decrypted in the process of S3106, and the scramble key Ks is obtained (extracted or generated) (S3109). . Next, the encrypted control command ECC stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 403a is decrypted with the scramble key Ks decrypted in the process of S3109, the control command CC is obtained (extracted or generated), and the control command CC is obtained. The CC is stored in the transmission command buffer 403d (S3110). After the processing of S3110, the process proceeds to S3111. The control command CC set in the transmission command buffer 403d in the processing of S3110 is transmitted to the sub-controllers 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, and 111B of the transmission source of the multiplexed command MECC based on the destination information in the command transmission processing of the main processing (S3004 in FIG. 34). 113 only.

The sub-controllers 111 and 113 that have received the control command CC decoded from the decoding device 400 execute various game controls based on the control command CC.

In the process of S3111, the encrypted control command ECC stored in the encrypted control command storage unit 403a, the encrypted scramble key EKs stored in the encrypted scramble key storage unit 403b, and the encrypted work key storage unit 403c. Each encrypted work key EKw is cleared (initialized) (S3111), the separation and decryption processing (S3002) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34). In this way, when performing demultiplexing and decoding based on the reception of one multiplexed command MECC, the encryption control command is stored each time a command indicating the demultiplexing and decoding result is generated (extracted). By initializing the section 403a, the encrypted scramble key storage section 403b, and the encrypted work key storage section 403c, when demultiplexing and decrypting the next multiplexed command MECC, the content of the previously received multiplexed command MECC is restored. are prevented from being mixed, and the demultiplexing and multiplexing of the multiplexed command MECC can be appropriately performed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, the authentication card 500 issued by the gaming machine maker in pair with the pachinko machine 10 is When not compatible with the pachinko machine 10, by not decrypting the encrypted and multiplexed multiplexed command MECC and not normally acquiring (extracting or generating) the control command CC, the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 If the combination of the numbers does not match, the pachinko machine 10 cannot be played normally. Therefore, when the main control device 110 is modified by fraudulent acts, or when illegal resale to a sales destination unintended by the game machine maker is performed, the authentication card 500 legally issued by the game machine maker can be used. is not inserted into the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation performance or the like in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, if the game machine maker does not intend to cheat or illegally resell the game, by preventing the normal game from being played on the pachinko machine 10, the game hall will not suffer any disadvantages due to the cheating. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be managed by the manufacturer.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the authentication card 500 is configured so that the expiration date can be set. Whether or not the information ED (see FIG. 18) is within the validity period enables setting whether or not decryption is possible using the master key Km (see FIG. 18) stored in the master key storage unit 501b (see FIG. 17). It is configured. By configuring the expiration date information ED to be updatable by the data server 510 of the game machine manufacturer, even if the expiration date of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall is set to exceed the expiration date, the pachinko machine can be used. By disabling normal operation of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to ensure legal compliance by preventing the execution of games on the pachinko machine 10 that have exceeded the installation time limit.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the authentication card 500 is lent by the game machine manufacturer to the game hall when the pachinko machine 10 is sold, and the pachinko machine 10 is sold as a used machine to other game halls. When reselling (selling), the authentication card 500 is temporarily returned to the game machine manufacturer, and the registration data of the authentication card 500 is temporarily canceled. Then, the expiration date information ED (see FIG. 18) of the returned authentication card 500 is updated (extended), etc., so that the authentication card 500 is reissued in a state in which it can be used in the pachinko machine 10 of the resale destination, and the pachinko machine is played. The machine 10 is lent to a game hall to which the machine 10 is sold (resale destination). By operating the authentication card 500 in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall of the resale destination is fraudulently acted, the pachinko machine 10 cannot be played normally. be able to. Therefore, if the main controller 110 or the like is altered or remodeled due to fraudulent acts by a malicious third party at the amusement hall to which the pachinko machine is to be resold. 10 can be prevented from operating normally, and unintended addition of game values and execution of games based on fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed. In addition, since the game machine maker can grasp the distribution form of the pachinko machine 10 as a second-hand machine, maintenance and after-sales follow-up of the pachinko machine 10, and sales activities as a new business destination can be facilitated. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the encrypting device 300 and the decrypting device 400 are not provided with a so-called backup function, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the contents held up to that time are stored. , and is configured to wake up from the initialized state each time the power is turned on. In particular, the encryption device 300 generates a work key Kw used when encrypting control commands based on the serial number SN stored in the main controller 110, and the work key Kw is retained even after the power is turned off. Otherwise, for example, when the main controller 110 is illegally replaced while the power is off, it becomes possible to encrypt the control command with the backed up work key Kw. Therefore, the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 used for encrypting and decrypting the control commands are initialized each time the power is turned on and off, and the work key Kw is renewed, and the production number SN is sent from the main controller 110. Configure to get and generate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts based on the work key Kw being backed up.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, unless the encryption device 300 generates the work key Kw based on the serial number SN included in the serial number command transmitted from the authorized main controller 110, the control Since encryption and multiplexing processing related to the command CC cannot be executed, the main controller is replaced with an unauthorized main controller, the encryption device 300 is made to store the unauthorized work key Kw, and the authentication card 500 is also made to store the unauthorized work key Kw. It is possible to prevent the execution of a game by unauthorized authentication based on storing a unique production number (work key Kw).

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the sub-controllers 111 and 113, the control command CC transmitted from the main controller 110 is always encrypted and multiplexed via the encryption device 300. Since it is configured to be received as a multiplexed command MECC, when a command other than the multiplexed command MECC is received from the encryption device 300 (main controller 110 side), the encryption device 300 or the main controller 110 There is a possibility that some abnormality (wiring abnormality, encryption or multiplexing processing abnormality, unauthorized replacement of the encryption device 300, etc.) has occurred. Therefore, when a command other than the multiplexing command MECC is received from the encryption device 300, it is possible to stop the game or detect the abnormal state early by executing a predetermined abnormality process.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the sub-controllers 111 and 113, the control command CC received from the main controller 110 via the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 is When the pairing with the authentication card 500 is normal (normal), the multiplexed command MECC is demultiplexed and decoded in the decoding device 400 before being received. Therefore, if a command that has not been decrypted normally is received from the decryption device 400, some abnormality (wiring abnormality, separation or decryption abnormality, unauthorized replacement of the decryption device 400, authentication card 500 failure (eg, card reading error) may have occurred. Therefore, when a command that has not been decoded normally is received from the decoding device 400, it is possible to stop the game or detect the abnormal state early by executing a predetermined error process. Become.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the decoding process of the multiplexed command MECC, it is determined whether or not the work key Kw to be decoded first matches, and it is determined that they do not match. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the control command CC from being decrypted and to reduce the processing load by preventing the subsequent decryption processing from being performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 49. FIG. Regarding the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the case where the player directly plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700, which is a part of the game hall D, uses a predetermined transmission path (for example, the Internet, an ad-hoc network, or a dedicated line). A computer network (hereinbelow, the "Internet" may be exemplified in relation to the transmission path) to access the hall computer 600 of the game hall D so that it can be operated from outside the game hall, and the pachinko machine The game result (game state) in 10 is photographed by the video camera 701 and can be output outside the game hall D. A player (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "user") uses a terminal device (for example, a personal computer, hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "PC") owned by the player to play a game through the above transmission path. The hall computer 600 of the game hall D is accessed from outside the hall D, and the game can be played by operating the pachinko machine 10, and the game result photographed by the video camera 701 is transmitted to the terminal device PC of the user himself/herself. configured to be viewable by The game results at the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the hall computer 600 for each user's account, and a desired prize can be exchanged based on the game results. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 without going directly to the game hall D, and furthermore, to go to the game hall D and acquire a predetermined prize based on the game result. , and the games in the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified.

The pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 36, the usage mode when the pachinko machine 10 manufactured by the game machine maker A in the second embodiment is installed in the game hall D will be described. FIG. 36 shows the flow of the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 in the game machine manufacturer A and the game hall D in the second embodiment, and the connection between the hall computer 600 in the game hall D and the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining that it is configured to be connectable via the .

As shown in FIG. 36, the pachinko machines 10a to 10d manufactured by the game machine maker A are given a unique serial number SN generated by the data server 510 as in the first embodiment. The same (corresponding) serial number SN is stored (written) in each main controller 110 of 10d and each IC chip 501 of each of the authentication cards 500a to 500d.

Then, when the pachinko machines 10a to 10d are sold to the game hall D from the game machine maker A, the pachinko machines 10a to 10d installed in the game hall D are authenticated corresponding to the pachinko machines 10a to 10d. By inserting the cards 500a to 500d, the pachinko machines 10a to 10d in the game hall D are ready for normal operation.

In the game hall D, there are places where players actually go to the game hall D and play games on the pachinko machines 10a and 10b, and users X to Z who use their own terminal devices PCx to PCz to access the game hall D via the Internet. A virtual hall 700 is provided in which a game can be played on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d by accessing the hall computer 600 from the outside.

In this virtual hall 700, video cameras 701c and 701d capable of photographing game modes of the pachinko machines 10c and 10d are provided. The video cameras 701c and 701d photograph the front side (the board surface of the game board 13) of the pachinko machines 10c and 10d, and show how the balls discharged from the ball shooting unit 112a flow down on the board surface of the game board 13, 1. A picture of winning a winning opening such as the starting opening 64a and the content of the variable effect on the third pattern display device 81 is sent to the terminal devices PCx to PCz of the users X to Z via the hall computer 600 and the Internet. 42). Details of this captured image will be described later with reference to FIG.

The business hours of this virtual hall 700 are set to the same connectable time (for example, 9:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m.) as when a player visits the game hall D to play a game. When the user plays a game on the terminal device PC, it is possible to select a pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 and play a game within the connectable time, while the connectable time is exceeded. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 in the virtual hall 700 cannot be selected and a game cannot be played on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Also, the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700 are configured so that players who actually go to the game hall D cannot play games. This is because, for example, when the user X is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10c via the Internet, if a player who goes to the game hall D plays a game on the pachinko machine 10c, one pachinko machine 10c There are multiple players (users) for the game, and it is unclear which player (user) should be paid out the game results, etc., and there is a risk of causing unnecessary confusion. be.

Each pachinko machine 10a-10d installed in the game hall D is electrically connected to the hall computer 600 installed in the game hall D, respectively. The hall computer 600 displays the results of the games played on the pachinko machines 10a to 10d (the number of variations of special symbols, the number of jackpots, the number of ball payouts, the number of wins to the first start port 64a, the jackpot game state, the "probability etc.) can be aggregated and managed (grasp) respectively, and can be accessed by the terminal devices PCx-PCz owned by users X-Z from outside the game hall D via the Internet. there is

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the electrical configuration of each facility in the game hall D in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the hall computer 600 of the game hall D. As shown in FIG. The game hall D of the second embodiment includes at least a hall computer 600 configured to be able to communicate with the outside of the game hall D via the Internet, and a pachinko machine 10a configured to be able to transmit and receive data to and from the hall computer 600. 10d and video cameras 701c and 701d capable of individually photographing the game modes of the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700, respectively.

The pachinko machines 10a to 10d are electrically connected to the hall computer 600 as described above, and are configured to be able to output the game results and game states of the pachinko machines 10a to 10d to the hall computer 600. Also, the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700 are configured to be able to shoot balls toward the game area with a predetermined shooting intensity based on instructions from the hall computer 600. FIG. Specifically, as in the case where the operation handle 51 is turned by the player, based on a shooting instruction (command) indicating the shooting intensity from the hall computer 600, the game area is opened with the shooting intensity corresponding to the shooting instruction. It is configured to be able to shoot a ball toward.

The video cameras 701c and 701d are electrically connected to the hall computer 600 and are configured to be capable of individually photographing the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700, respectively. Specifically, based on a shooting instruction (command) from the hall computer 600, the corresponding pachinko machines 10c and 10d (for example, the video camera 701c for the pachinko machine 10c and the video camera 701d for the pachinko machine 10d) ) (the board surface of the game board 13), and can enlarge or reduce the shot image based on an enlargement/reduction instruction (command) from the hall computer 600 as well. Images captured by the video cameras 701 c and 701 d are transmitted to the hall computer 600 .

The hall computer 600 is equipped with an MPU 601 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 601 includes a ROM 602 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 601 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 602 are executed. A RAM 603 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

The RAM 603 of the hall computer 600 has at least a member information storage section 603a and a game execution data storage section 603b.

The member information storage unit 603a stores account information (Identification Information) including personal information for each user who plays a game on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700 from outside the game hall D via the Internet. ID information”), game history information, game result information, and the like.

The game execution data storage unit 603b stores account information (ID information) of users who are playing games on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700, information for playing games on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d, and so on. This is an area for storing each game result information.

Details of the member information storage unit 603a and the game execution data storage unit 603b provided in the RAM 603 of the hall computer 600 of the second embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of the member information storage unit 603a and the game execution data storage unit 603b of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 38, the member information storage unit 603a is connected to the hall computer 600 via the Internet, and is formed for each user who has registered member information. , game history information 603a2 storing a history of games played by each user, and game points held by each user for playing games on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700 are stored. It has at least retained game points 603a3 and retained and awarded points 603a4 for storing the awarded points acquired as a result of each user playing a game on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d.

Specifically, for example, when the user X registers as a member, the member ID information 603a1 indicating the user X, the game history information 603a2 indicating the game history played by the user X, and the user X information as the user X information. A held game point 603a3 indicating a game point for X to play a game on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700, and the user X playing a game on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700. As a result, a retained grant point 603a4 indicating the granted grant points is formed. Similarly, when user Y or user Z registers as a member, member ID information 603a1, game history information 603a2, retained game points 603a3, and retained and awarded points 603a4 are generated.

In the second embodiment, when a game is played on a predetermined pachinko machine 10 installed in a virtual hall 700 and given points as a result of the game, a game based on the given points can only be played on the same pachinko machine 10. configured to be able to do so. Specifically, when the awarded points acquired by the user are stored (added) to the held awarded points 603a4 at the end of the game of the pachinko machine 10, they are stored in association with the game history information 603a2. Then, when the user plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 again, whether or not the given points held by the user have been acquired by the pachinko machine 10 based on the information stored in the game history information 603a2. If the given points are obtained by the pachinko machine 10, a game (ball shooting) can be played based on the given points, while if the points are not given by the pachinko machine 10. , the pachinko machine 10 cannot be played (ball shooting) with the given points, and can be played only with the game points.

The game execution data storage unit 603b is for storing various types of information of users who play games on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700. First execution data storage unit, second execution data storage unit, third execution data storage unit, . Each section is provided. Specifically, for example, the first execution data storage unit of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10c, and the second execution data storage unit of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10d. The parts are configured to correspond.

Each of the execution data storage units stores the execution member ID information 603b1 for storing the account information of the users who are playing the pachinko machines 10c and 10d, and the user who is currently playing the pachinko machines 10c and 10d. It has at least an executed game point 603b2 for storing the game points held and an executed imparted point 603b3 for storing the imparted points currently acquired by the users playing the pachinko machines 10c and 10d.

In the second embodiment, when the user accesses the hall computer 600 from outside the game hall D via the Internet and plays a game on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d installed in the virtual hall 700, first, the pachinko machine to be played is Various information of the user stored in the member information storage unit 603a is stored in the corresponding execution data storage units in the first to Xth execution data storage units of the game execution data storage units 603b corresponding to the machines 10c and 10d. . Then, a game can be played on the pachinko machines 10c and 10d based on the various information stored in the execution data storage section. A detailed flow of playing a game from outside the game hall D in the virtual hall 700 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description is continued. An input/output port 605 is connected to the MPU 601 of the hall computer 600 via a bus line 604 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 605 is connected to at least the pachinko machines 10a to 10d, the video cameras 701c and 71d, and the Internet line.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the electrical configurations of the pachinko machine 10 and hall computer 600 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 600. As shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is provided with an external input/output terminal 800 on the inner frame 12 . The external input/output terminal 800 is electrically connected to at least the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, various game information relating to the game can be input from the main controller 110 to the external input/output terminal 800 . Also, the payout control device 111 is configured to be able to input prize ball payout information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout control device 111 and shot number information regarding the number of shot balls. It is configured to be able to output launch instruction information for instructing the launch of the ball.

The external input/output terminal 800 is also electrically connected to the hall computer 600 . When various game information is input to the external input/output terminal 800 from the main controller 110 described above, the various game information is output to the hall computer 600 . Also, when prize ball payout information or shot number information is input from the payout control device 111 to the external input/output terminal 800, the prize ball payout information or shot number information is output to the hall computer 600. there is Further, when shooting instruction information is input from the hall computer 600 to the external input/output terminal 800 , the shooting instruction information is output to the payout control device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, the flow and display contents of a game played on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 of the game hall D by the user's terminal device (for example, a personal computer) PC. explain. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing transmission and reception of information among the pachinko machine 10, the video camera 701, the hall computer 600, and the user's terminal device PC in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 41 is a diagram exemplifying a top screen showing a virtual hole displayed on the monitor 900 of the user's terminal device PC, and FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the game execution screen. 40, the terminal device PC, the hall computer 600, the pachinko machine 10, and the video camera 701 will be mainly described while referring to FIGS. 41 and 42 as needed. Display contents displayed on the monitor 900 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 40, when a user outside the game hall wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 of the game hall, first, the user himself/herself owns a terminal device PC via the Internet. Then, the user accesses the hall computer 600 and performs member registration procedures for registering the user's account information, password, etc. on the gaming site operated by the gaming hall (see S4102 in FIG. 44). When the member registration is completed, the user's account information and the like are stored in the member information storage section 603a of the hall computer 600. FIG.

When the account information and password are entered on the login screen (not shown) of the gaming site, and the account information and password are successfully authenticated, the information is stored in the member information storage unit 603a of the hall computer 600. User information such as member ID information, game history information, held game points, and held awarded points corresponding to the user's account information is transmitted to the user's terminal device PC (see S4105 in FIG. 44). Then, on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC that has received the user information, an initial screen (top screen) of a "virtual hall screen" displaying member ID information, retained gaming points, retained and granted points, etc. based on the user information is displayed. displayed (not shown).

In the logged-in state, the user is set in the virtual hall 700 when a value of at least "0" or more remains in the retained game points (the model-limited grant points in the case of a game played on the same pachinko machine 10). It is possible to execute a game in the pachinko machine 10 where the player is. On the other hand, when the retained game point is "0", it is not possible to shift to the "game machine selection screen" described later in FIG. cannot be executed.

Here, when the retained gaming points are "0", or when the user wishes to increase the retained gaming points, the user uses his or her own credit card or the like to access the hall computer 600 from the user's terminal device PC. A purchase request for a predetermined number of gaming points (for example, 1000 points, 2000 points, 3000 points, 5000 points, or 10000 points, where 1 point = 1 yen) is made by online payment, and the member information storage unit 603a of the hall computer 600 The purchased game points are given (added) to the held game points stored in , so that the held game points can be increased (see S4108 in FIG. 44). The game points purchased by the user are immediately added (reflected) to the held game points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a corresponding to the user, and the game can be played using the held game points 603a3. .

Next, on the condition that the user is logged in, when the user selects (clicks) a later-described "model selection button" displayed on the "virtual hall screen", the "gaming machine selection screen" shown in FIG. It is displayed on the monitor 900 of the device PC. A user can select a pachinko machine 10 to play from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10 displayed on the "game machine selection screen" and installed in the virtual hall 700 by operating the terminal device PC. When a predetermined pachinko machine 10 is selected on the "gaming machine selection screen" (see FIG. 41), a model selection request corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the hall computer 600. FIG.

On the "gaming machine selection screen" shown in FIG. 41, "Hall name display (here, expressed as "virtual hall")" is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the user's member ID is displayed on the upper center slightly right of the screen. An "account image" corresponding to the information is displayed, and a "logout button" that can be selected (clicked, hereinafter the same) by the user when the user wants to end the game in the virtual hall 700 is displayed on the upper right side of the screen. . In addition, on the "game machine selection screen", below the "hall name display", "account image" and "logout button", a "top button" selectable by the user, a "model selection button", A "prize list button" is displayed. In addition, these "hall name display", "account image", "logout button", "top button", "model selection button", and "prize list button" are the same as "top button" and "model selection button ” or “Premium list button” is selected, the fixed (header) display continues on the screen of the monitor 900 .

The "top button" is the "model selection screen (see Fig. 41)" displayed when the "model selection button" is selected, and the "prize selection screen" displayed when the "prize list button" is selected. (not shown)” is displayed, the “top button” is selected to immediately return to the initial screen (top screen) of the “virtual hall screen”.

The "model selection button" is a button for displaying a "game machine selection screen" on which a pachinko machine 10 to be played can be selected from among the pachinko machines 10 installed in the virtual hall 700.例文帳に追加When this "model selection button" is selected, the "gaming machine selection screen" shown in FIG. 41 is displayed. In this "gaming machine selection screen", for each pachinko machine 10, a "model whole image" showing the overall image of the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 (variable jackpot probability), a probability variable ratio , "Spec image" showing game specifications such as variable probability continuation conditions, whether other users are currently playing, past game history (number of jackpots, number of consecutive games, and special patterns after the jackpot) A "state image" indicating the number of fluctuations, etc.) and a "play button" selected when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 are displayed in combination. By scrolling the "gaming machine selection screen" downward, the "model image", "spec image" and "status image" corresponding to all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 are displayed. configured as possible.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 where the "play button" image is displayed in black and "play" is currently not played by any user, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the game can be executed. This indicates a state in which the user can select the On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in which the "play button" image is reversed in white and displayed as "playing" indicates that another user is currently playing a game, and the user cannot select it. showing. Therefore, when the user wants to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700, the game is played only when the pachinko machine 10 with a black "play button" image and "play" displayed is selected. be able to.

When the pachinko machine 10 to be played is selected on this "game machine selection screen", a model selection request is transmitted to the hall computer 600, and the hall computer 600 responds to the model selection request and the usage status of the pachinko machine 10. to confirm. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-playing state (an unselected state by another user), the pachinko machine 10 is not being played by any user. A game permission signal is output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 600, the video camera 701 is turned on, and transmission of image information of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is started (S4204 to S4209 in FIG. 45). reference).

As shown in FIG. 40, the hall computer 600, which has received the game permission signal and the video information from the pachinko machine 10, is logged in and sends the request to the terminal device PC of the user who has sent the model selection request via the Internet. The video information received from the video camera 701 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted. The terminal device PC of the user that has received the video information from the hall computer 600 displays the current state of the pachinko machine 10 on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC based on the video information (hereinafter referred to as "game execution screen"). (see FIG. 42, which will be described later). That is, the user remotely operates the pachinko machine 10 (for example, shoots a ball) while confirming the state of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 using his/her own terminal device PC on the "game execution screen". ) becomes possible.

At this time, if the user has played a game in the pachinko machine 10 in the past and has earned points, the points earned by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "model-limited awarded points") are All the awarded points (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total awarded points") and the game points held by the user are transmitted from the hall computer 600 to the terminal device PC (see S4206 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, if the user has not played a game in the pachinko machine 10 in the past or if there are no awarded points, all the awarded points and the game points held by the user will be sent from the hall computer 600 to the terminal device PC. It is transmitted (see S4205 in FIG. 45).

In the second embodiment, among all the awarded points acquired in the past at a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the virtual hall 700, the model-limited awarded points acquired at one pachinko machine 10 are the pachinko machine 10 The points can be used at the time of replaying, and the other pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the model-limited imparted points cannot be used. By constructing in this way, it is possible to promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10 that has obtained the model-limited imparted points, and to promote the purchase of game points when the model-limited imparted points do not exist. In addition, when there are both game points and model-limited imparted points, the model-limited imparted points are consumed first.

Then, when the user selects (clicks) a "fire button image", which will be described later in FIG. A game execution request is transmitted to the hall computer 600 via the Internet, and the hall computer 600 receives the game execution request. Only when there are points to be awarded, a game execution request including the firing intensity is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 responding to the game execution request (see S4305 in FIG. 46).

The pachinko machine 10, which has received the game execution request including the shooting intensity, shoots one ball with the shooting intensity corresponding to the game execution request (see S5002 in FIG. 49), and displays the game execution indicating that one ball has been shot. Execution result information indicating the execution result is transmitted to hall computer 600 (see S5003 in FIG. 49). The hall computer 600, which has received the execution result information, subtracts "1" from the executed game points 603b2 in the game execution data storage unit 603b or the executed awarded points 603b3 corresponding to the model-limited awarded points (see S4308 or S4309 in FIG. 46). At this time, if the shot ball wins a prize in one of the winning holes 64a or the like, the pachinko machine 10 transmits a game value command (given points) corresponding to the number of prize balls to the hall computer 600 (see FIG. 49). S5005), the hall computer 600 that has received the game value command adds the points corresponding to the game value command to the execution award points 603b3 of the game execution data storage unit 603b (see S4311 in FIG. 46).

After receiving the execution result information, the hall computer 600 transmits the execution result information to the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet (not shown in FIG. 40), and the terminal device PC receiving the execution result information updates (that is, subtracts 1) the value of the "game point image" or the value of the "given point image" if model-limited imparted points exist. Also, the hall computer 600 that has received the game value command transmits the game value command to the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet (not shown in FIG. 40), and the terminal device PC that received the game value command updates (for example, adds 10 to) the value of the "given point image" according to the game value command.

Next, when the user selects (clicks) the "logout button" on the top screen (not shown) of the "virtual hall screen" or the "gaming machine selection screen" shown in FIG. When the user selects (clicks) the "logout button" on the "game execution screen", the terminal device PC transmits a game end request to the hall computer 600 via the Internet. The hall computer 600 that has received the game end request transmits a game end request to the pachinko machine 10 and the video camera 701 when the user is playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 in the virtual hall 700 . The pachinko machine 10 that has received the game end request ends the subsequent game in the pachinko machine 10, and the video camera 701 that has also received the game end request turns off the power of the video camera 701 and sends a signal to the hall computer 600. The transmission of video information is stopped (see S4404 and S4405 in FIG. 47). Also, the hall computer 600 stores the executed game points 603b2 and the executed awarded points 603b3 stored in the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 as the game history information 603a2 based on the execution member ID information 603b1. Store in the retained game points 603a3 and retained and awarded points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a (see S4403 in FIG. 47), and clear the contents of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 ( See S4404 in FIG. 47). As a result, the image of the "game execution screen" of the pachinko machine 10 is not displayed on the terminal device PC of the user.

When the hall computer 600 receives the game end request, if the user is not playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 in the virtual hall 700 (when the model is not selected), the pachinko machine 10 The data stored in the game execution data storage unit 603b is stored in the member information storage unit 603a based on the member ID information without transmitting a game end request or instructing the video camera 701 to turn off the power. .

Next, when the user selects (clicks) the "prize list button" displayed on the "virtual hall screen", a list of various prizes that can be exchanged according to the points held by the user is displayed. list screen” is displayed (not shown). The various prizes displayed on the "gift list screen" can be exchanged only with the given points held by the user, and cannot be exchanged with the gaming points held by the user.

In the second embodiment, even when the user goes directly to the game hall D, the given points held by the user can be exchanged for prizes prepared in advance in the game hall D. When directly going to the game hall D to exchange prizes, the membership card (not shown) held by the member is set in advance so that the data in the member information storage section 603a of the hall computer 600 correspond to each other. By inserting the membership card into a membership card reader (not shown) electrically connected to the 600, the holdable points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a are read, and the holdable points 603a4 are used to obtain desired prizes. The prize exchange is performed only when the player has the points required for the exchange, and the points corresponding to the prize are subtracted from the retained given points 603a4.

Here, with reference to FIG. 42, the "game execution screen" displayed on the monitor 900 of the user's terminal device PC when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 will be described. In the "game execution screen" shown in FIG. 42, a "model name image" displaying the model name of the selected pachinko machine 10 is displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and the user's "account image" and a "logout button" are displayed in the upper right part of the screen. ” is displayed. The "account image" and "logout button" have the same functions as those displayed on the "gaming machine selection screen". When the "logout button" is selected (clicked) on this "game execution screen", the game being selected and being executed is forcibly terminated, and the screen shifts to the "virtual hall screen". .

In this "game execution screen", a "board image" showing the current game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 selected by the user is displayed in the center of the screen. In the upper left part of this "board image", there are a "game number image" indicating the number of executions of the special symbol variation effect performed since the end of the previous big win in this pachinko machine 10, and today's connection in this pachinko machine 10. A “jackpot number image” showing the number of jackpots within the available time and a “probability variation number image” showing the number of jackpots in which the “probability fluctuation state” occurred within the connectable time of the day are displayed.

In the state of FIG. 42, the "number of games image" is "150", the "number of big wins image" is "12", and the "variable probability image" is "7". That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the end of the previous big win is "150 times", the big win of the day is "12 times", and the big win that generated the "probability change state" is "150 times". 7 times” has occurred.

These "game number image", "jackpot number image" and "probability variation number image", each time the event (that is, the stop of the special symbol 1 variation effect, the occurrence of the jackpot or the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot) occurs The display number is configured to count up. In addition, the "game number image" is initialized (cleared to 0) when a jackpot occurs, and the "jackpot number image" and "probability variable number image" are initialized (0 cleared).

In the center left part of the "board image", there are a "manual play button" for the user to shoot balls from the pachinko machine 10 displayed in the "board image", and a button for shooting balls from the pachinko machine 10. a ``semi-auto play button'' that continuously and automatically shoots balls from the pachinko machine 10, and ``reach display'' and when the opening and ending of the big win occur, the balls are shot. or automatically set the firing intensity according to the game state (for example, left-handed game in "normal game state" and right-handed game in "probability fluctuation state"). It is Then, a user who plays a game (shoots balls) on the pachinko machine 10 selects any one of the above-mentioned "manual play button", "semi-auto button" or "auto play button" to start the game on the pachinko machine 10. configured to do so. Unselected buttons are displayed in white with black characters, while selected buttons are reversed from the non-selected state and displayed in black with white characters. be.

In the state of FIG. 42, the "manual play button" is selected. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is used to shoot a ball, the user selects (clicks) a "shooting button" or a "shooting intensity image" to be described later, and performs an operation each time to shoot the ball (game). indicates that it will be done.

In the upper right part of the "board image", there are a "game point image" showing the game points currently held by the user, and a "model limited award point image" showing the model limited award points currently held by the user. and are displayed.

In the second embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 to be played is selected on the above-described "model selection screen", the user stored in the held game points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a holds The game points are stored in the executed game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b, and the value of the game points stored in the executed game points 603b2 is displayed in the "game point image". When the game points displayed in the "game point image" are "0" or more, the pachinko machine 10 displayed in the "board image" is in a state where balls can be shot. On the other hand, when the game point displayed in the "game point image" is "0", it is displayed in the "board image", except when the "model limited award point image" described later is "0" or more. The pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which balls cannot be shot.

Similarly, when the pachinko machine 10 to be played is selected on the "model selection screen", the pachinko The model-limited imparted points acquired by the user in the machine 10 are stored in the execution imparted points 603b3 of the game execution data storage unit 603b, and the value of the model-limited imparted points stored in the execution imparted points 603b3 is a "model-limited imparted point image". to be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 42, "2,500 shots" is displayed in the "game point image", and "0 shots" is displayed in the "model limitation given point image". That is, the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 is in a state in which 2,500 balls can be shot, and the remaining value of the prize balls obtained in the past in the pachinko machine 10 is 0. there is

In the second embodiment, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 displayed as the "board image" and a ball enters one of the winning holes 64a or the like as a result of the game to win a prize ball, this "machine model A value is added (counted up) to the “limitation point image”. In the second embodiment, the ball can be shot with the model-limited award points displayed in the "model-limited award point image". That is, the model-limited award points displayed in the "model-limited award point image" indicate the accumulated value of the prize balls obtained in the pachinko machine 10, and the game is performed in the pachinko machine 10 with the model-limited award points. However, other pachinko machines 10 cannot play games, and are configured to allow the above-described prize exchange.

In the lower right part of the "board image", when a ball is shot from the pachinko machine 10 displayed in the "board image", "shooting intensity a "handle icon image" that changes in conjunction with the "firing intensity image"; A "fire button image" for firing a ball from the pachinko machine 10 displayed as a "board image" is displayed. In the second embodiment, for example, when the "shooting intensity image" indicates the first stage, the ball is shot at a shooting intensity that does not reach the game area of the game board 13 and become a foul ball. In a state in which the "intensity image" indicates the 10th level, the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it a so-called right-handed game. That is, no matter which stage is set, the ball does not become a foul ball, so processing when a foul ball occurs becomes unnecessary, and the control load of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 600 can be reduced.

The state shown in FIG. 42 shows a state in which the user has selected the firing intensity of the fifth level in the "fire intensity image". In this state, if the above-described "manual play button" is selected, the "semi-auto play button" or "auto play button" is selected when the "fire button image" is selected (clicked) by the user. If so, unless the "semi-auto play button" or "auto play button" is deselected (that is, until the "manual play button" is selected), the "board image A ball is shot from the pachinko machine 10 displayed as .

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 shoots balls at intervals of “0.6 seconds” like the ball shooting intervals of the actual pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, for example, when the "manual play button" is selected, if the "fire button image" is continuously operated multiple times (for example, three times) within "0.6 seconds", the multiple times The number of balls (for example, 3 shots) corresponding to the operation of is fired at "0.6 seconds" intervals, and if "semi-auto play button" or "auto play button" is selected, "0.6 seconds A ball is fired at intervals.

In the lower left part of the "board image", a "game end button" for ending the game on the pachinko machine 10 displayed on the "board image", an operation method on this "game execution screen", and frequently A "help button" for shifting to a "help screen (not shown)" displaying a list of questions (so-called FAQ, etc.) is displayed. When the user playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 presses the "game end button", the game points currently displayed in the "game point image" are changed from the executed game points 603b2 to the retained game points. 603a3, and the value of the executed game point 603b2 is cleared. Further, the model-limited grant points displayed in the "model-limited grant point image" are added (stored) to the grant points other than the model-limited grant points stored in the execution grant points 603b3 to the hold grant points 603a4. Then, the value of the execution grant point 603b3 is cleared.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 which is a part of the game hall D is configured to be operable from outside the game hall by accessing the hall computer 600 of the game hall D via the Internet. , the game result in the pachinko machine 10 can be photographed by a video camera 701 and output outside the game hall D. - 特許庁In addition, the user can access the hall computer 600 of the game hall D from outside the game hall D via the Internet using a terminal device PC owned by the user, and operate the pachinko machine 10 to play a game. In addition, the game results captured by the video camera 701 can be displayed by the user's own terminal device PC. The game results at the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the hall computer 600 for each user's account, and a desired prize can be exchanged based on the game results. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 without going directly to the game hall D, and furthermore, to go to the game hall D and acquire a predetermined prize based on the game result. , and the games in the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 601 in the hall computer 600 of the game hall D will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. FIG. The processing of the MPU 601 is roughly divided into main processing (see FIG. 43). FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by MPU 601 in hall computer 600 . The hall computer 600 is configured so that when the power of the hall computer 600 is turned on, start-up processing such as initial setting processing is executed, and after completion of the start-up processing, the main processing (see FIG. 43) is executed. It is

In the main processing in the hall computer 600, first, user membership registration processing and authentication processing associated with access from the user's terminal device PC, and account processing for executing processing for a game point purchase request are performed (S4001). This account processing (S4001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S4001, in the above account processing (S4001), processing for setting game points and awarded points in the hall computer 600 based on the model selection request from the terminal device PC of the logged-in user, and processing for pachinko machine 10 Model selection processing for starting up the video camera 701 is executed (S4002). This model selection process (S4002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S4002, a game execution process is performed (S4003) for executing the process related to the game on the pachinko machine 10 selected by the user in the model selection process (S4002). This game execution processing (S4003) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S4003, in response to a game end request from the terminal device PC of the logged-in (account authenticated) user, processing such as storing game points and awarded points and turning off the power of the video camera 701 is executed. A game end process is performed (S4004). This game end processing (S4004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S4004, a gift exchange process is performed to execute a process based on a gift exchange request from the member card reader of the game hall D via the user's terminal device PC or the membership card held by the user (S4005). . This gift exchange process (S4005) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S4005, the process proceeds to S4001, and the processes of S4001 to S4005 are repeatedly executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, account processing (S4001), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by MPU 601 in hall computer 600, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this account processing (S4001). As described above, in this account processing (S4001), the user's member registration processing and authentication processing associated with access from the user's terminal device PC, and the processing for requesting purchase of game points are executed.

In the account processing (S4001), first, it is determined whether or not a membership registration request has been received from the user's terminal device PC via the Internet (S4101). As a result of the determination, if a membership registration request has been received from the user's terminal PC (S4101: Yes), new member ID information, terminal PC information, etc. are obtained based on the account (personal) information entered by the user. A member registration setting process to be stored in the member information storage unit 603a is performed (S4102), the account process (S4001) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 43). As a result, the user's account information is set (stored) in the member information storage unit 603a of the hall computer 600, and a game can be played on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700. FIG.

As a result of the determination of the processing in S4101, if it is determined that the member registration request has not been received from the user's terminal PC (S4101: No), then it is determined whether or not the login request has been received from the user's terminal PC. It discriminates (S4103). As a result of determination, if a login request has been received from the terminal device PC of the user (S4103: Yes), it is determined whether account authentication based on the login request is normal (S4104).

As a result of the determination in S4104, if the account authentication is not normal, that is, the user information registered (stored) in the member information storage unit 603a does not match the information input by the user at the time of the current login request. If so (S4104: No), this account processing (S4001) is terminated without performing the processing of S4105 because it is not a login request from a user registered as a member or there is an error in the input information. Return to the process (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, if it is determined that the account authentication is normal (S4104: Yes), the login request is from a user who has been registered as a member in advance. That is, the retained gaming points 603a3 and retained granted points 603a4 are transmitted to the terminal device PC of the user who requested the login (S4105), the account processing (S4001) is terminated, and the main processing (FIG. 43 ). As a result, the game points and awarded points held by the user are displayed on the monitor 900 of the user's terminal device PC.

As a result of determination in S4103, if a login request from the user's terminal PC has not been received (S4103: No), then it is determined whether or not a game point purchase request has been received from the user's terminal PC. (S4106). As a result of determination, if a request to purchase gaming points has been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4106: Yes), it is determined whether the account has been authenticated (logged in) (S4107), and if the account has not been authenticated (S4107: No), since the user who purchases game points is not specified, the process of S4108 is skipped, the account process (S4001) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, if it is determined that the account has been authenticated (S4107: Yes), the game points corresponding to the purchase amount included in the purchase request for the game points are added to the held game points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a. (S4108), this account processing (S4001) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43). In the process of S4106, if the purchase request for game points has not been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4106: No), this account process (S4001) is terminated and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 43). return.

Next, model selection processing (S4002), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by MPU 601 in hall computer 600, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the model selection process (S4002). As described above, in the model selection process (S4002), game points and grant points are set in the hall computer 600 based on a model selection request from the terminal PC of the logged-in user in the account process (S4001). Also, model selection processing for activating the video camera 701 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

In the model selection process (S4002), first, it is determined whether or not a model selection request has been received from the terminal device PC of the user (S4201). As a result of determination, if a model selection request has not been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4201: No), the model selection processing (S4002) is ended and the main processing (see FIG. 43) is returned to. On the other hand, if a model selection request has been received from the terminal device PC of the user (S4201: Yes), then whether or not the account authentication of the terminal device PC has been completed, that is, whether or not the model was selected during login (S4202).

As a result of the determination in S4202, if the account authentication of the terminal device PC has not been completed (S4202: No), it is not a model selection request while logged in, so this model selection processing (S4002) is terminated and the main processing (Fig. 43). In this case, the screen shifts to a login screen prompting the user to login. On the other hand, in the process of S4202, if it is determined that the account authentication of the terminal device PC has been completed (S4202: Yes), the model selection request is during login. 10, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being played by another user (is unused) (S4203).

As a result of the determination in S4203, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 for which the model selection request has been made is not used by another user and is unused (S4203: Yes), the game can be played on the pachinko machine 10. In order to do so, first, it is determined whether or not there are points that have been given by the pachinko machine 10 in the past (S4204). This determination is made by referring to the game history information 603a2 and the retained/provided points 603a4 stored in the member information storage unit 603a of the user. As a result of determination, if there are no awarded points acquired in the pachinko machine 10 in the past (S4204: No), since there are no usable awarded points in the pachinko machine 10, the retained gaming points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a Only the stored game points are stored in the execution game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4207. As a result, the user can shoot balls from the pachinko machine 10 based on the game points stored in the game execution data storage unit 603b.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4204, if it is determined that there are points awarded in the pachinko machine 10 in the past (S4204: Yes), the held game points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a are stored in the game execution data storage unit 603b. While storing in the execution game points 603b2, of the points stored in the holding and giving points 603a4, the model-limited giving points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the execution giving points 603b3 of the game execution data storage unit 603b ( S4206), and the process proceeds to S4207. As a result, the user can shoot balls from the pachinko machine 10 based on the model-limited award points and game points stored in the game execution data storage unit 603b.

Next, in the process of S4207, data of the game execution screen including each data stored in the game execution data storage unit (that is, execution grant points 603b3 and execution game points 603b2) is transmitted to the terminal device PC of the user ( (S4207), the power of the video camera 701 corresponding to (capturing) the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (S4208), and the video data of the pachinko machine 10 captured by the video camera 701 is sent to the terminal device PC of the user. (S4209), terminates the model selection process (S4002), and returns to the main process (see FIG. 43). As a result, on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC of the user who received the data of the game execution screen, the game execution screen including the "board image", "game point image" and "given point image" of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. be done.

Next, the game execution process (S4003), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 601 in the hall computer 600, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this game execution process (S4003). As described above, in the game execution process (S4003), the process related to the game on the pachinko machine 10 selected by the user in the model selection process (S4002) is executed.

In the game execution process (S4003), first, it is determined whether or not the model of the pachinko machine 10 to be played by the user has been selected on the model selection screen (S4301). As a result of determination, when the model of the pachinko machine 10 to be played is not selected by the user (S4301: No), this game execution processing (S4003) is terminated and the main processing (see FIG. 43) is returned to. On the other hand, if the model of the pachinko machine 10 on which the game is to be played is selected by the user (S4301: Yes), then a game execution request from the user's terminal device PC on the game execution screen, that is, when the "manual play button" is selected It is determined whether or not the ``shooting button image'' has been selected, or whether ``0.6 seconds'' have passed since the last shot of the ball when the ``semi-auto play button'' or ``auto play button'' was selected (S4302). As a result of the determination, if there is no game execution request from the user's terminal device PC on the game execution screen, that is, if the "shoot button image" is not selected when the "manual play button" is selected, or if the "semi-auto play button" or If "0.6 seconds" has not elapsed since the previous ball was shot when the "auto play button" was selected (S4302: No), the processing of S4303 to S4305 is skipped in order not to shoot the ball from the pachinko machine 10. Then, the process proceeds to S4306.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S4302, when a game execution request is made from the user's terminal device PC on the game execution screen, that is, when the "manual play button" is selected and the "fire button image" is selected, or the "semi-auto play button" or If "0.6 seconds" has passed since the previous shot of the ball when the "auto play button" was selected (S4302: Yes), next, whether or not model-limited imparted points are stored in the execution imparted points 603b3 (S4303 ), or if model-specific points are not stored in the execution grant points 603b3 (S4303: No), it is determined whether game points are stored in the execution game points 603b2 (S4304).

As a result of the determination, if model-limited imparted points are stored in the executed imparted points 603b3 in the processing of S4303 (S4303: Yes), or if game points are stored in the executed gaming points 603b2 in the processing of S4304 ( S4304: Yes) Since the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is possible to shoot balls, the pachinko machine issues a game execution instruction (request) including shooting intensity data corresponding to the shooting intensity selected in the "shooting intensity image". 10 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 receiving the game execution request including the shooting intensity data shoots one ball with intensity corresponding to the shooting intensity while the model-limited imparted points are preferentially used over the game points.

In the process of S4303, if model-limited points are not stored in the executed awarded points 603b3 (S4303: No), and if game points are not stored in the executed game points 603b2 in the process of S4304 (S4304: No ), the ball cannot be shot from the pachinko machine 10, so the process of S4305 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4306. As a result, when there are no model-limited imparted points or no game points, balls cannot be shot from the pachinko machine 10, so that users who do not possess model-limited imparted points or game points cannot play games on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加You can prevent it from running.

In the process of S4306, it is determined whether execution result information indicating the game execution result (that is, one ball is shot) has been received from the pachinko machine 10 that has transmitted the game execution request (S4306). As a result of determination, if the execution result information has been received (S4306: Yes), it means that one ball has been shot in response to the above game execution request, so the execution grant points 603b3 of the game execution data storage unit 603b are then given. (S4307). As a result of the determination, if model-limited imparted points are not stored in the execution imparted points 603b3 (S4307: No), since the user does not possess model-limited imparted points, the execution game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b are stored. is subtracted by "1" (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, if model-limited imparted points are stored in the execution imparted points 603b3 (S4307: Yes), the game execution data storage unit 603b is executed in order to preferentially consume the model-limited imparted points over the game points owned by the user. "1" is subtracted from the given point 603b3 (S4309), and the process proceeds to S43100. As a result, when the user has model-limited points, the model-limited points are preferentially used. Each point the user has is subtracted based on the ball launch result at 10 .

In the process of S4306, if the game execution result information is not received from the pachinko machine 10 that transmitted the game execution request (S4306: No), the processes of S4307 to S4309 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4310. do.

In the process of S4310, it is determined whether or not the game value data transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 that has transmitted the game execution request is received based on the fact that the shot ball has won a prize in a predetermined winning hole 64a or the like (S4310). . As a result of determination, if the game value data has been received from the pachinko machine 10 (S4310: Yes), points (model-limited given points) corresponding to the number of prize balls included in the game value data are given to the game execution. It is added to the execution award points 603b3 of the data storage unit 603b (S4311), the game execution processing (S4003) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the game value data has not been received from the pachinko machine 10 (S4310: No), the process of S4311 is skipped, the game execution process (S4003) is terminated, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 43). return. As a result, the hall computer 600 memorizes the points given according to the prize balls won by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, game end processing (S4004), which is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by MPU 601 in hall computer 600, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this game end processing (S4004). As described above, in this game end processing (S4004), in response to a game end request from the terminal device PC of the logged-in (account authenticated) user, the processing for storing the game points and the awarded points and the power supply of the video camera 701 are executed. Execute processing such as turning off.

In the game end processing (S4004), first, it is determined whether or not account authentication of the user's terminal device PC has been completed, that is, whether or not login is in progress (S4401). As a result of the determination, if the account authentication of the terminal device PC has not been completed (S4401: No), it means that login is not in progress, so the game end processing (S4004) is ended and the main processing (see FIG. 43) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the account authentication of the terminal device PC has been completed (S4401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a game end request has been received from the user's terminal device PC ( S4402). As a result of the determination, if a game end request has not been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4402: No), the user has not indicated an intention to end the game, so the processing of S4403 to S4406 is skipped, This game end processing (S4004) returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43).

In the processing of S4402, if a game end request has been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4402: Yes), it indicates that the user intends to end the game in the pachinko machine 10 that is being executed. Therefore, in order to save the game in the pachinko machine 10 so far, first, the executed game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b are stored in the retained game points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a, and the game execution data storage unit The execution grant point 603b3 of 603b is stored (added) to the retained grant point 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4404. As a result, the game points remaining in the game being executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the acquired awarded points (model-limited awarded points) are stored (saved) in the hall computer 600.例文帳に追加

Next, in the process of S4404, the game points and awarded points stored in the game execution data storage unit 603b, that is, the contents of the executed game points 603b2 and executed awarded points 603b3 are cleared (initialized) (S4404), The process moves to S4405. As a result, the game points and awarded points relating to the pachinko machine 10 are cleared, so that when the next user who wants to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 plays a game on the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be It is possible to prevent the redundant use of the game points owned by the user playing the game and the awarded points acquired.

In the process of S4405, transmission of video data received from the video camera 701 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped to the user's terminal device PC (S4405), and then the power of the video camera 701 is turned off. (S4406), the game end processing (S4004) is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 43) is returned to. As a result, the video display of the "board image" of the pachinko machine 10 ends on the terminal device PC of the user, and the "virtual hole screen" is displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the prize exchange process (S4005), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 601 in the hall computer 600, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this gift exchange process (S4005). As described above, in this gift exchange process (S4005), processing is executed based on a gift exchange request from the member card reader of the game hall D via the user's terminal device PC or the membership card held by the user.

In the gift exchange process (S4005), first, it is determined whether or not account authentication of the user's terminal device PC has been completed, that is, whether or not login is in progress (S4501). As a result of the determination, if the account authentication of the terminal device PC has not been completed (S4501: No), the processes of S4502 to S4505 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4506. On the other hand, if the account authentication of the terminal device PC has been completed (S4501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined gift exchange request has been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4502). As a result of the determination, if a predetermined gift exchange request has been received from the terminal device PC (S4502: Yes), the point 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a corresponding to the terminal device PC is stored as the object of the gift exchange request. It is determined whether or not there are more points to be given corresponding to the given prize (S4503).

As a result of the determination in S4503, if there are more points to be given than the prize that is the object of the gift exchange request in the held given points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a corresponding to the terminal device PC ( S4503: Yes) Since it is possible to exchange the gift corresponding to the user's gift exchange request, the number of points corresponding to the gift requested for the gift exchange request is calculated from the retained and granted points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a. Subtract the given points (S4504), and send the prize (for example, send a notification email notifying that a prize exchange request has been made, notify the hall staff, etc., list up the target prize, print the shipping slip, etc.) ) is performed (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. Based on the notice from the hall computer 600, the employee of the game hall D selects the prize requested for the prize exchange from the list, packs it into a box, attaches a shipping slip to the box, and then ships it. Thereby, even if the user does not go to the game hall D, the desired prize can be obtained even at the delivery destination (for example, at home).

In the process of S4502, if the gift exchange request has not been received from the terminal device PC of the user (S4502: No), or in the process of S4503, the retained and given points in the member information storage unit 603a corresponding to the terminal device PC If there are no given points in 603a4 corresponding to the prize for which the gift exchange request is made (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 and S4505 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4506. .

In the process of S4506, it is determined whether or not a gift exchange request has been received from the connection terminal (that is, membership card reader) connected to the hall computer 600 in the game hall D (S4506). As a result of determination, if a prize exchange request has been received from a connection terminal connected to the hall computer 600 (S4506: Yes), the member information storage unit 603a corresponding to the player (user) linked to the member card. It is determined whether or not there are in the held imparted points 603a4 of the number of imparted points equal to or greater than the amount corresponding to the gift for which the gift exchange request is made (S4507).

As a result of the determination in S4507, it is determined that there are more points to be given than the prize for which the gift exchange request is made, in the held and given points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a corresponding to the player linked to the membership card. If so (S4507: Yes), it means that the player (user) can exchange the prize corresponding to the prize exchange request. Points given corresponding to the given prize are subtracted (S4508), a receipt showing (printed with) information on the prize to be exchanged is issued (S4509), and this prize exchange processing ( S4005) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 43). As a result, it becomes possible to go directly to the game hall D and exchange prizes with the given points acquired by the user's terminal device PC, which motivates the user (player) to go to the game hall D.

In the processing of S4506, if a gift exchange request has not been received from the connection terminal connected to the hall computer 600 (S4502: No), or in the processing of S4507, it corresponds to the player linked to the membership card. If there are no granted points equal to or greater than the amount corresponding to the prize for which the gift exchange request is made in the held and granted points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a (S4507: No), the processing of S4508 and S4509 is performed. By skipping, the prize exchange process (S4005) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 43).

Next, referring to FIG. 49, command transmission/reception processing executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this command transmission/reception processing. The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is configured so that a start-up process (not shown) is performed when the power is turned on, and a main process (not shown) is repeatedly performed after the end of the start-up process. It is executed as one process of the main process. In this command transmission/reception processing, when a game execution request (instruction) transmitted from the hall computer 600 to the payout control device 111 via the external input/output terminal 800 is received, balls are shot based on the game execution request. , and transmits game value data including prize ball information to the hall computer 600 via the external input/output terminal 800 when a prize ball is generated in the pachinko machine 10 .

In the command transmission/reception process of the payout control device 111, first, it is determined whether or not a game execution request has been received from the hall computer 600 (S5001). As a result of determination, if a game execution request has been received from the hall computer 600 (S5001: Yes), a shooting control command for shooting a ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the shooting intensity included in the game execution request is set. (S5002), a game execution result command indicating that one ball has been shot is set (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004.

The firing control command set in the process of S5002 is transmitted to the firing control device 112 in the main processing, and the firing control device 112 receiving the firing control command sets the firing intensity included in the firing control command. In response, the ball shooting unit 112a is driven to shoot one ball.

Also, the game execution result command set in the process of S5003 is transmitted to the hall computer 600 via the external input/output terminal 800 in the main process, and the hall computer 600 receiving the game execution result command Subtraction processing of the execution game points 603b2 or the execution grant points 603b3 of the corresponding user's game execution data storage unit 603b is executed.

In the process of S5001, if the game execution request is not received from the hall computer 600 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5004.

Next, in the processing of S5004, it is determined whether or not the shot ball has entered any of the prize winning openings 64a or the like to generate prize balls (S5004). As a result of determination, if there are prize balls (S5004: Yes), a game value command corresponding to the number of prize balls is set (S5005), this command transmission/reception processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing. .

The game value command set in the process of S5005 is transmitted to the hall computer 600 via the external input/output terminal 800 in the main process, and the hall computer 600 receiving the game value command sends the corresponding user's The number of prize balls included in the game value command is added to the execution award points 603b3 of the game execution data storage unit 603b.

In the process of S5004, if no prize is generated (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped, the command transmission/reception process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700, which is a part of the game hall D, is connected to the hall computer 600 of the game hall D via a transmission path such as the Internet. The pachinko machine 10 is constructed so that it can be accessed and operated from outside the game hall, and the game result (game state) in the pachinko machine 10 is photographed by a video camera 701 and can be output outside the game hall D. - 特許庁In addition, the terminal device PC owned by the user can be used to access the hall computer 600 of the game hall D from outside the game hall D through the transmission path, and operate the pachinko machine 10 to play a game. , and the game result captured by the video camera 701 can be displayed by the user's own terminal device PC. The game results at the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the hall computer 600 for each user's account, and a desired prize can be exchanged based on the game results. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 without going directly to the game hall D, and furthermore, to go to the game hall D and acquire a predetermined prize based on the game result. , and the games in the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the "shooting intensity image" indicates the first stage, the ball is shot at a shooting intensity that does not reach the game area of the game board 13 and become a foul ball. In a state in which the "intensity image" indicates the 10th level, the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it a so-called right-handed game. That is, no matter which stage is set, the ball does not become a foul ball, so processing when a foul ball occurs becomes unnecessary, and the control load on the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 600 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, among all the awarded points acquired in games on a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 in the past, the model-limited awarded points acquired by one pachinko machine 10 are The points can be used when replaying on the machine 10 and cannot be used on other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加By constructing in this way, it is possible to promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10 that has obtained the model-limited imparted points, and to promote the purchase of game points when the model-limited imparted points do not exist.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 57. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D in the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 is configured to be playable from outside the game hall D via the hall computer 600 by the user's terminal device PC. The pachinko machine 10 other than the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 of the game hall D, i.e., the game hall D, is configured so as to be exchangeable for prizes based on the awarded points acquired by the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it is not possible to play the game by going directly to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D of the third embodiment, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D are configured to be accessible from outside the game hall D, and the user's terminal device A game can be executed on all pachinko machines 10 installed in a game hall D from a PC. Also, a player who goes directly to the game hall D can play games with all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D.例文帳に追加Furthermore, it is possible to directly go to the game hall D and play the game only at the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the given points obtained by playing the game on the terminal device PC, and directly to the game hall D. It is also possible to play the game from the terminal device PC only at the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the points given by going and playing the game.

The pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D in the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D in the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first and second embodiments, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a mode of use when the pachinko machine 10 manufactured by the game machine maker A according to the third embodiment is installed in the game hall D. FIG. FIG. 50 shows the flow of the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 in the game machine manufacturer A and the game hall D in the third embodiment, and the connection between the hall computer 600 in the game hall D and the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining that it is configured to be connectable via the .

As shown in FIG. 50, the pachinko machines 10a to 10c manufactured by the gaming machine maker A are assigned a unique serial number SN generated by the data server 510, as in the second embodiment. The same (corresponding) serial number SN is stored (written) in each main controller 110 of 10c and each IC chip 501 of each of the authentication cards 500a to 500c.

Then, when the pachinko machines 10a to 10c are sold to the game hall D from the game machine maker A, the pachinko machines 10a to 10c installed in the game hall D are authenticated corresponding to the pachinko machines 10a to 10c. By inserting the cards 500a to 500c, the pachinko machines 10a to 10c in the game hall D become operable normally.

The pachinko machines 10a to 10c installed in the game hall D are configured so that players can actually go to the game hall D to play games, and users X to Z can use their own terminal devices PCx to PCz. By accessing the hall computer 600 from outside the game hall D via the Internet, it is possible to play a game.

In the game hall D of the third embodiment, each pachinko machine 10a-10c is provided with each video camera 701a-701c capable of photographing each game mode. The video cameras 701a to 701c photograph the front side of the pachinko machines 10a to 10c (the board surface of the game board 13) as in the second embodiment. of users X to Z via the hall computer 600 and the Internet. It is configured to be able to transmit live to terminal devices PCx to PCz (see FIG. 50).

It should be noted that the opening hours for directly going to the gaming hall D to play games and the connectable hours for accessing and playing games via the Internet are set to be the same time (for example, 9:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m.). That is, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet, it is possible to select and play the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D within the connectable time. , the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D cannot be selected and a game cannot be played on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in which a player who actually went to the game hall D is playing a game is configured so that the game cannot be played by the terminal device PC via the Internet. Similarly, the pachinko machine 10 in which a game is executed by the terminal device PC via the Internet is configured so that a player who actually goes to the game hall D cannot play the game. This is because, for example, when a user is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet, if a player who goes to the game hall D plays a game on the pachinko machine 10, one pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, there are a plurality of players (users), and it is unclear to which player (user) the game results should be paid out, which may cause unnecessary confusion. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the electrical configuration of each facility in the game hall D in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the hall computer 600 of the game hall D. As shown in FIG. The game hall D of the third embodiment includes at least a hall computer 600 configured to be able to communicate with the outside of the game hall D via the Internet, and a pachinko machine 10a configured to be capable of transmitting and receiving data to and from the hall computer 600. 10c, and video cameras 701a to 701c capable of individually photographing the game modes of the pachinko machines 10a to 10c installed in the game hall D, respectively.

The pachinko machines 10a to 10c are electrically connected to the hall computer 600 as described above, and are configured to be able to output to the hall computer 600 the game results and game states of the pachinko machines 10a to 10c. In addition, the pachinko machines 10a to 10c are configured to be able to shoot balls toward the game area with a predetermined shooting intensity based on instructions from the hall computer 600. FIG. Specifically, as in the case where the operation handle 51 is turned by the player, based on a shooting instruction (command) indicating the shooting intensity from the hall computer 600, the game area is opened with the shooting intensity corresponding to the shooting instruction. It is configured to be able to shoot a ball toward.

The video cameras 701a-701c are electrically connected to the hall computer 600, and are configured to be capable of individually photographing all the pachinko machines 10a-10c installed in the game hall D, respectively. Specifically, based on the shooting instruction (command) from the hall computer 600, the corresponding pachinko machines 10a to 10c (for example, the video camera 701a for the pachinko machine 10a, the video camera 701b for the pachinko machine 10b) , and for the pachinko machine 10c, the front side of the video camera 701c) (the board surface of the game board 13) is photographed, and similarly based on the enlargement/reduction instruction (command) from the hall computer 600, the photographed image can be enlarged or reduced. configured as possible. Images captured by the video cameras 701 a to 701 c are transmitted to the hall computer 600 .

A member information storage unit 603a provided in the RAM 603 of the hall computer 600 includes personal information of each user who plays a game on the pachinko machines 10a to 10c installed in the hall D from outside the hall D via the Internet. This is an area for storing account information, game history information, game result information, and the like.

The game execution data storage unit 603b stores account information (ID information) of users playing games on the pachinko machines 10a to 10c installed in the game hall D, information for playing games on the pachinko machines 10a to 10c, This is an area for storing each game result information.

Details of the member information storage unit 603a and the game execution data storage unit 603b provided in the RAM 603 of the hall computer 600 of the third embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of the member information storage unit 603a and the game execution data storage unit 603b of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 52, the member information storage unit 603a is connected to the hall computer 600 via the Internet and formed for each user who has registered member information. , game history information 603a2 for storing a history of games played by each user, and a holding game for storing game points held by each user in order to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D. It has at least a point 603a3 and a model-limited retained awarded point 603a4 for storing model-limited granted points obtained as a result of each user playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 in association with game history information 603a2 for each model. there is

Specifically, for example, when the user X registers as a member, the member ID information 603a1 indicating the user X, the game history information 603a2 indicating the game history played by the user X, and the user X information as the user X information. A held game point 603a3 indicating a game point for X to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D, and a game point given as a result of the user X playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D. A hold imparted point 603a4 is formed for storing all imparted points including the model-limited hold imparted point that stores the model-limited imparted points in association with the gaming history information 603a2 of the user. Similarly, when user Y or user Z registers as a member, member ID information 603a1, game history information 603a2, retained game points 603a3, and retained and awarded points 603a4 are generated.

In the third embodiment, when a game is played on a predetermined pachinko machine 10 installed in a game hall D via the Internet, and the game result and the given model-limited award points are given, the same pachinko machine is played. 10, it is possible to play a game based on the model-limited imparted points. Specifically, when the model-limited grant points acquired based on the user playing the game via the Internet are stored (added) to the model-limited hold grant points 603a4 at the end of the game of the pachinko machine 10, the game It is stored in association with the history information 603a2. Then, when the user or player plays a game again on the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet or by going directly to the game hall D, the user or player can make a game based on the information stored in the game history information 603a2. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the model-limited imparted points held by the player have been acquired by the pachinko machine 10, and if the model-limited imparted points are acquired by the pachinko machine 10, the model-limited imparted points are granted. While it is possible to play a game (shoot balls) based on the points, if the points are not model-limited grant points acquired by the pachinko machine 10, the game (shoot balls) of the pachinko machine 10 can be played with the model-limited grant points. ), and the game is configured to be possible only with game points. By constructing in this way, the model-limited imparted points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet can be used, although limited to the pachinko machine 10, when the game is played by going directly to the game hall D. Therefore, the games in the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified. It should be noted that the awarded points obtained by directly going to the game hall D and playing the game are counted as game points at the end of the game, and can be used in other pachinko machines 10 as well.

The game execution data storage unit 603b is for storing various kinds of information of users who play games on the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D, and stores first execution data so as to correspond to each pachinko machine. section, a second execution data storage section, a third execution data storage section, . ing. Specifically, for example, the first execution data storage unit of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10a, and the second execution data storage unit of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10b. . . . The X-th execution data storage section of the game execution data storage section 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10X.

Each execution data storage unit stores execution member ID information 603b1 for storing account information of a user or player who is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10, and a user or player who is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10. At least an execution game point 603b2 for storing the game points currently held by the pachinko machine 10 and a model-limited execution grant point 603b3 for storing the model-limited grant points currently acquired by the user or player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 10. have.

In the third embodiment, when the user accesses the hall computer 600 via the Internet from outside the game hall D and plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D, or directly goes to the game hall D, When playing a game on the pachinko machine 10, first, the user stored in the member information storage unit 603a is stored in the first to Xth execution data storage units of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be played. Alternatively, various information of the player is stored in the corresponding execution data storage section. A game can be played on the pachinko machine 10 based on various information stored in the execution data storage unit.

Next, referring to FIG. 53, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D by the user's terminal device PC, and when the game is played on the pachinko machine 10 by going directly to the game hall D The flow and its display contents will be explained. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing transmission and reception of information among the pachinko machine 10, the video camera 701, the hall computer 600, and the user's terminal device PC in the third embodiment. Note that in the third embodiment, the flow of processing relating to prize exchange will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the processing related to member registration, the processing based on the login request, the processing related to the purchase of game points, and the processing related to the end of the game via the Internet are the same as those in the second embodiment, so illustration or description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the user selects (clicks) the "model selection button" displayed on the "virtual hall screen" on condition that the user is logged in, the "gaming machine selection screen" (FIG. 41) is displayed. ) is displayed on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC. A user can select a pachinko machine 10 to play from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10 displayed on the "game machine selection screen" and installed in the game hall D by operating the terminal device PC. When a predetermined pachinko machine 10 is selected on the "gaming machine selection screen", a model selection request corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the hall computer 600. - 特許庁

When the pachinko machine 10 to be played is selected on this "game machine selection screen", a model selection request is transmitted to the hall computer 600, and the hall computer 600 responds to the model selection request and the usage status of the pachinko machine 10. to confirm. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-execution state (an unselected state of other users and players), the pachinko machine 10 can be used by any user or player. Since it has not been done, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a game permission signal to the hall computer 600, the video camera 701 is turned on, and transmission of image information of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is started. At this time, the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D is displayed as "playing" on the third symbol display device 81, suggesting that the player who went directly to the game hall D cannot execute the game. .

As shown in FIG. 53, the hall computer 600, which has received the game permission signal and the video information from the pachinko machine 10, is logged in and sends the request to the terminal device PC of the user who has sent the model selection request via the Internet. The video information received from the video camera 701 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted. The terminal device PC of the user that has received the video information from the hall computer 600 displays the current "game execution screen" of the pachinko machine 10 on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC based on the video information. The user can remotely operate the pachinko machine 10 (for example, shoot a ball) while confirming the state of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D using his/her own terminal device PC on the "game execution screen". becomes possible.

At this time, if the user has played a game in the pachinko machine 10 in the past and there are model-limited imparted points acquired, the model-limited imparted points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 and the game points held by the user are combined into a hall computer. 600 to the terminal device PC (see S4105 in FIG. 55). If the user has not played a game in the pachinko machine 10 in the past, or if there are no model-limited imparted points acquired, only the game points held by the user are transmitted from the hall computer 600 to the terminal device PC. .

In the third embodiment, out of all the points awarded in games on a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D in the past via the Internet, the model-limited awarded points earned by one pachinko machine 10 are In the pachinko machine 10, it can be used when replaying via the Internet or when playing a game directly at the game hall D, and in other pachinko machines 10, the model-limited imparted points can be used. It is configured in such a way that it cannot By constructing in this way, it is possible to promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10 that has obtained the model-limited imparted points, and to promote the purchase of game points when the model-limited imparted points do not exist. In addition, when there are both game points and model-limited imparted points, the model-limited imparted points are consumed first.

Then, when the user selects (clicks) the "fire button image" while the "game execution screen" is being displayed on the monitor 900 of the user's terminal PC, the hole is sent from the terminal PC via the Internet. A game execution request is sent to the computer 600, which includes the shooting strength of the ball. After that, the hall computer 600 that has received the game execution request, only when the user's game points or model-limited imparted points stored in the hall computer 600 exist, to the pachinko machine 10 responding to the game execution request. to transmit a game execution request including the firing intensity.

The pachinko machine 10, which has received the game execution request including the shooting intensity, shoots one ball with the shooting intensity corresponding to the game execution request (see S5002 in FIG. 56), and displays the game execution indicating that one ball has been shot. Execution result information indicating the execution result is transmitted to hall computer 600 (see S5003 in FIG. 56). The hall computer 600 that has received the execution result information subtracts "1" from the execution game points 603b2 or model-limited execution grant points 603b3 in the game execution data storage unit 603b. At this time, if the shot ball wins a prize in one of the winning holes 64a or the like, a game value command (given points) corresponding to the number of prize balls is transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 600 (see FIG. 56). S5005), the hall computer 600 that has received the game value command adds the model-limited execution awarded points corresponding to the game value command to the model-limited execution awarded points 603b3 of the game execution data storage unit 603b.

After receiving the execution result information, the hall computer 600 transmits the execution result information to the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet (not shown in FIG. 53), and the terminal device PC receiving the execution result information updates (that is, subtracts 1) the value of the "game point image" or the value of the "given point image" if model-limited imparted points exist. Also, the hall computer 600 that has received the game value command transmits the game value command to the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet (not shown in FIG. 53), and the terminal device PC that received the game value command updates (for example, adds 10 to) the value of the "given point image" according to the game value command.

Next, in the third embodiment, when the player directly goes to the game hall D to play a game, the member card (not shown) held by the player is inserted into the card sandwich (shown in the figure) provided for each pachinko machine 10 . (not shown), a game can be played in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. Specifically, based on the member ID information stored in the member card, authentication with the member information storage unit 603a of the hall computer 600 is performed, and if the member card is successfully authenticated, the member information Balls can be shot from the pachinko machine 10 on the condition that there are game points and model-limited imparted points stored in the storage unit 603a. During execution of the game on the pachinko machine 10, the game result is accumulated in the member card. When the player ends the game at the pachinko machine 10, by ejecting the member card, the model-limited grant points acquired during the game and the remaining game points are stored in the member information storage unit 603a of the hall computer 600. Stored (added).

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the flow of requesting the game machine maker A to exchange the novelty goods based on the model-limited imparted points acquired by the user or player will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the transmission and reception of information between the data server of the game machine manufacturer A, the hall computer 600, and the terminal device PC of the user in the third embodiment.

In the third embodiment, in accordance with the model-limited imparted points that the user or player has acquired at a predetermined pachinko machine 10, the user sends the game machine maker A from the terminal device PC to the game machine maker A. Goods related to the pachinko machine 10 (so-called novelty goods) can be directly exchanged.

As shown in FIG. 54, when the user is logged in to hall computer 600, hall computer 600, upon receiving a novelty goods exchange request from the user's terminal device PC, It is determined whether or not the user possesses the above model-limited grant points, and if the user possesses model-limited grant points equal to or more than the amount necessary for exchanging novelty goods, the game machine manufacturer A to send a request for exchange of novelty goods. Upon receiving the novelty goods exchange request, gaming machine maker A transmits a novelty goods delivery schedule and the like to hall computer 600 on the condition that the novelty goods corresponding to the exchange request are in stock. Carry out shipping procedures for novelty goods (e.g., printing shipping slips, packing boxes, etc.). The hall computer 600, which has received the delivery schedule and the like from the game machine manufacturer A, performs subtraction processing of model-limited imparted points according to the novelty goods, and transmits the delivery schedule of the novelty goods to the terminal device PC of the user.

With this configuration, the user can enjoy the pachinko machine installed in the game hall D without going to the game hall D or directly purchasing the novelty goods with cash at the site of the game machine maker A. Novelty goods can be obtained based on the model-limited points acquired by the machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, in order to obtain desired novelty goods, it is possible to increase the motivation of the user to play the pachinko machine 10 and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10 . Furthermore, in the game hall D, there is no need to keep inventory of novelty goods, and a wide variety of prize exchange modes can be realized. Note that when exchanging novelty goods with model-limited points, the novelty goods may be exchanged at an exchange rate that is more favorable than when exchanging gifts with normal points.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, account processing (S4001), which is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by MPU 601 in hall computer 600 of the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this account processing (S4001). In the account processing (S4001) of the third embodiment, when a player is playing a game in the game hall D, the account corresponding to the player is configured not to allow the terminal device PC to play the game. Conversely, when the user is playing a game on the terminal device PC via the Internet, the game hall D is configured so that the member card corresponding to the user is not allowed to play the game in the game hall D. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a so-called multi-player game in which one player (user) multi-players multiple pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加In addition, by preventing multi-tasking games, for example, in a situation where one pachinko machine 10 hits a big hit and a ball must be shot, in a situation where the other pachinko machine 10 loses game points, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 that has generated the big win cannot shoot balls and cannot acquire the game value of the big win. In addition, in the account processing (S4001) of the third embodiment, the description of the same processing as that of the second embodiment is omitted.

In the account processing (S4001) of the third embodiment, as a result of the determination in S4104, if it is determined that the account authentication is normal (S4104: Yes), then one of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall D It is determined whether or not a membership card corresponding to the user determined in the process of S4104 is inserted in the card sandwich attached to the machine 10 (S4151). As a result of the determination, if the membership card corresponding to the user determined in the process of S4104 is inserted in the card sandwich attached to one of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D (S4151: Yes) Since the member card of the user determined in the processing of S4104 has already been inserted in the game hall D and a game is being played on one of the pachinko machines 10, the processing of S4105 is skipped in order to prevent a so-called multiplayer game. , this account processing (S4001) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S4151, if the membership card corresponding to the user determined in the process of S4104 is not inserted in the card sandwich attached to any of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D ( S4151: No), since the player corresponding to the above user is not playing a game on the pachinko machine in the game hall D, the process proceeds to S4105 in order to make the game on the pachinko machine 10 executable.

Further, as a result of the determination of the process of S4106, if the purchase request for game points has not been received from the user's terminal device PC (S4106: No), then the membership card is inserted into the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10. It is determined whether or not the membership card insertion information indicating that the membership card has been inserted has been received (S4152). As a result of determination, if the member card insertion information has been received from the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S4152: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the personal identification number preset in the member card has been correctly entered. is determined (S4153). If the PIN code of the membership card inserted in the card sandwich is not correctly entered by the player (S4153: No), there is a possibility that the player who entered the PIN code is not a regular member of the membership card. Therefore, without performing the processing of S4154 and S4155, this account processing (S4001) is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 43) is returned to.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S4153, if the PIN number of the membership card inserted in the card slot was correctly entered (S4153: Yes), then the user corresponding to the membership card performs account authentication from the terminal device PC. It is determined whether or not it is performed (S4154). As a result of determination, if account authentication has been performed from the terminal device PC by the user corresponding to the membership card (S4154: Yes), the player who has already inserted the membership card determined in the process of S4153 via the Internet. Since a game is being played on one of the pachinko machines 10 by the user corresponding to , the process of S4155 is skipped in order not to allow a so-called multiplayer game, the account process (S4001) is terminated, and the main process (Fig. 43 ). On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S4154, if the user corresponding to the membership card has not performed account authentication from the terminal device PC (S4154: No), the user corresponding to the player of the membership card via the Internet. Since no game is being played, the process proceeds to S4155 in order to make the game on the pachinko machine 10 executable.

In the process of S4155, the game points stored in the member information storage unit 603a and the model-limited imparted points corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, that is, the retained game points 603a3 and the model-limited retained imparted points 603a4 are transferred to each other when the member card is inserted. The data is sent to the card sand attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S4155), the account processing (S4001) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43).

In the processing of S4152, if it is determined that the membership card insertion information has not been received from the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S4152: No), then the membership card is ejected from the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10. Then, it is determined whether or not the information on the game points and model-limited imparted points has been received (S4156). As a result of determination, if the membership card has been ejected from the card sand attached to the pachinko machine 10 and the information on the game points and model-limited grant points has not been received (S4156: No), this account processing (S4001) is terminated. and return to the main process (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the member card is ejected from the card slot attached to the pachinko machine 10 and the information on the game points and the model-limited award points is received (S4156: Yes), the received game points and the model-limited award points are Store (add) the retained game points 603a3 and retained granted points 603a4 of the member information storage unit 603a of the player (user) corresponding to the member card (S4157), terminate this account processing (S4001), and perform the main processing. (See FIG. 43).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to go directly to the game hall D and execute a game based on the data stored in the member information storage unit 603a. One player (user) plays multiple pachinko machines 10 while making it possible to execute the game based on the data stored in the member information storage part 603a in the pachinko machine 10 installed in D. So-called multiplayer games can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, command transmission/reception processing executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing command transmission/reception processing according to the third embodiment. In the command transmission/reception processing of the third embodiment, when a membership card is inserted into the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10, the game points or model-limited grant points held by the player (user) corresponding to the membership card are Perform ball launch based on Also, when the shot ball wins a prize in one of the prize-winning holes 64a or the like, the prize ball based on the prize is added as model-limited grant points. Furthermore, when there is a request to eject a member card, the processing of transmitting the game points and model-limited imparted points owned by the player at that time to the hall computer 600 is executed.

In the command transmission/reception processing of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a game is being played on any of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D by the user's terminal device PC via the Internet (S5051). . As a result of the determination, if the user's terminal device PC is playing a game on any of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D via the Internet (S5051: Yes), the processing of S5001 to S5005 is executed. Then, a process related to the game by the terminal device PC is executed, and the process proceeds to S5052. On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined by the user's terminal device PC via the Internet that any pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D is not playing a game (S5051: No), S5001 ∼S5005 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5052.

In the processing of S5052, it is determined whether or not a membership card is inserted in the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S5052). As a result of determination, if the membership card is not inserted in the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S5052: No), the process of S5053 is skipped, this command transmission/reception process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if a membership card is inserted in the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S5052: Yes), a game is executed with the game points or model-limited grant points owned by the player who has inserted the membership card. Then, the member card game process is executed (S5053), after which the command transmission/reception process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, referring to FIG. 57, the membership card game process (S5053), which is one process of the command transmission/reception process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 of the pachinko machine 10, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this membership card game process (S5053). In this membership card game process (S5053), a game is executed with the game points or model-limited grant points owned by the player corresponding to the membership card, and when the membership card is ejected from the card sand, A process of transmitting game points and model-limited imparted points owned by the player to the hall computer 600 is executed.

In the membership card game process (S5053), first, it is determined whether or not the ball shooting condition is satisfied in the pachinko machine 10 (S5101). The firing conditions are, for example, whether or not the ball firing unit 112a is normally driven, whether or not there is a ball to be fired, or whether or not the ball cannot be fired normally due to some abnormality. etc. is determined. As a result of the determination, if the ball shooting condition is not satisfied in the pachinko machine 10 (S5101: No), the ball cannot be normally shot. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the ball shooting condition is satisfied in the pachinko machine 10 (S5101: Yes), the ball is ready to be shot. It is sequentially determined whether or not the model-limited imparted points are greater than "0" and whether or not the pachinko machine 10 that acquired the model-limited imparted points matches the pachinko machine 10 (S5102 and S5103).

As a result of determination, the model-limited imparted point stored in the member card is a value larger than '0', and the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the model-limited imparted point matches the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加If so (S5102: Yes and S5103: Yes), the ball can be shot with the model-limited grant points owned by the player. , a firing control command corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 held by the player is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5108.

The firing control command set in the processing of S5105 is transmitted to the firing control device 112 in the main processing, and the firing control device 112 receiving the firing control command sets the firing intensity included in the firing control command. In response, the ball shooting unit 112a is driven to shoot one ball.

On the other hand, if the number of model limited points stored in the member card is not greater than "0", that is, if the number of model limited points is "0" (S5102: No), or if the model number stored in the member card Even if the limited points are greater than "0", if the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the model limited points does not match the pachinko machine 10 (S5102: Yes→S5103: No), the model limited points are given. Since the ball cannot be shot due to this, it is then determined whether or not the game points stored in the member card are greater than "0" (S5106).

As a result of the determination in S5106, if the game points stored in the member card are greater than "0" (S5106: Yes), the ball can be shot with the game points owned by the player. is decremented by "1" (S5107), the process proceeds to S5105, and a process of setting a firing control command to the firing control device 112 is executed. On the other hand, if the game points stored in the member card are not greater than "0", that is, if the game points are "0" (S5107: No), the ball cannot be shot due to the game points, so S5107. And the process proceeds to S5108 without performing the process of S5105.

In the process of S5108, it is determined whether or not a predetermined prize ball has been generated by the ball shot based on the process of S5105 entering one of the winning openings 64a or the like (S5108). As a result of the determination, if a ball has entered one of the winning holes 64a, etc., and a predetermined prize ball has been generated (S5108: Yes), the points given according to the number of prize balls are given as model-limited points. Add (S5109) and proceed to S5110. As a result, the player possesses the prize balls obtained by the pachinko machine 10 as the model-limited imparted points, and the game can be played with the model-limited imparted points. In the process of S5108, if it is determined that no ball has entered any of the winning holes 64a, etc., and no prize ball has been generated (S5108: No), the process of S5109 is skipped. The process proceeds to S5110.

In the process of S5110, it is determined whether or not the player has issued a request to eject a membership card from the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S5110). As a result of the determination, if there is a request to eject the membership card (S5110: Yes), the player has indicated the intention to end the game on the pachinko machine 10, so the card currently held by the player and stored in the membership card. information including the game points and model-limited imparted points are transmitted to the hall computer 600 (S5111), the membership card game process (S5053) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is no request to eject the membership card (S5110: No), the process of S5111 is skipped, the membership card game process (S5053) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, when the game on the pachinko machine 10 ends, the hall computer 600 can manage the model-limited imparted points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 and the remaining game points.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D are configured to be accessible from outside the game hall D, A game can be executed on all pachinko machines 10 installed in a game hall D from a terminal device PC of a user. Also, a player who goes directly to the game hall D can play games with all pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D.例文帳に追加Furthermore, only the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the given points obtained by playing the game on the terminal device PC can directly go to the game hall D to play the game, and directly to the game hall D. It is possible to play the game from the terminal device PC only for the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the given points obtained by going and playing the game. With such a configuration, the game can be played on the pachinko machine 10 without going directly to the game hall D, and the same game can be played from the terminal device PC via the Internet. Since the player can go to the game hall D and obtain a predetermined prize based on the game result, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is possible to directly go to the game hall D and execute a game based on the data stored in the member information storage unit 603a, and to access the game hall from the user's terminal device PC via the Internet. One player (user) plays multiple pachinko machines 10 while making it possible to execute the game based on the data stored in the member information storage part 603a in the pachinko machine 10 installed in D. So-called multiplayer games can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, model-limited grant points acquired based on the user's playing a game via the Internet are stored (added) to the model-limited hold grant points 603a4 when the game of the pachinko machine 10 ends. is stored in association with the game history information 603a2. Then, when the user or player plays a game again on the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet or by going directly to the game hall D, the user or player can make a game based on the information stored in the game history information 603a2. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the model-limited imparted points held by the player have been acquired by the pachinko machine 10, and if the model-limited imparted points are acquired by the pachinko machine 10, the model-limited imparted points are granted. While it is possible to play a game (shoot balls) based on the points, if the points are not model-limited grant points acquired by the pachinko machine 10, the game (shoot balls) of the pachinko machine 10 can be played with the model-limited grant points. ), and the game is configured to be possible only with game points. By constructing in this way, the model-limited imparted points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet can be used, although limited to the pachinko machine 10, when the game is played by going directly to the game hall D. Therefore, the games in the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same effects as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D in the third embodiment, a game can be executed on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D via the Internet by the user's terminal device PC, and the game can be played via the Internet. The model-limited imparted points obtained based on the above can be used only for the relevant pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D when directly going to the game hall D and playing a game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall D of the fourth embodiment, a game is executed on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D via the Internet by the user's terminal device PC, and based on the game The obtained game points can be used in all pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D when the game is played by directly going to the game hall D.例文帳に追加

The fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first to third embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the member information storage unit 603a and the game execution data storage unit 603b provided in the RAM 603 of the hall computer 600 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of the member information storage unit 603a and the game execution data storage unit 603b of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58, the member information storage unit 603a is connected to the hall computer 600 via the Internet and formed for each user who has registered member information. and a held game point 603a3 that stores the game points held by each user in order to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game history information 603a2 and the hold imparted points 603a4 in the third embodiment are not provided.

In the fourth embodiment, a game is played on a predetermined pachinko machine 10 installed in a game hall D via the Internet, and as a result of the game, game points, which are the same kind of points as the game points to be purchased, are awarded. is configured as Purchased or acquired game points are configured to be usable in all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D. Specifically, the game points acquired by the user through the Internet are stored (added) to the held game points 603a3 when the game of the pachinko machine 10 ends. Then, when the user or the player plays the pachinko machine 10 again via the Internet or by going directly to the game hall D, the game is played based on the game points held by the user or the player. (ball launch) becomes possible. By configuring in this way, when the game points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet are used to directly go to the game hall D to play the game, the games on the pachinko machine 10 can be diversified. In addition, the game points obtained by directly going to the game hall D and playing the game are counted as game points at the end of the game, and can be used in other pachinko machines 10 or the terminal device PC via the Internet. .

The game execution data storage unit 603b is for storing various kinds of information of users who play games on the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D, and stores first execution data so as to correspond to each pachinko machine. section, a second execution data storage section, a third execution data storage section, . ing. Specifically, for example, the first execution data storage unit of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10a, and the second execution data storage unit of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10b. . . . The X-th execution data storage section of the game execution data storage section 603b corresponds to the pachinko machine 10X.

Each execution data storage unit stores execution member ID information 603b1 for storing account information of a user or player who is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10, and a user or player who is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10. has at least an execution game point 603b2 that stores the game points currently held by the . In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the model-limited execution grant points 603b3 in the third embodiment are not provided.

In the fourth embodiment, when the user accesses the hall computer 600 from outside the game hall D via the Internet and plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D, or directly goes to the game hall D, When playing a game on the pachinko machine 10, first, the user stored in the member information storage unit 603a is stored in the first to Xth execution data storage units of the game execution data storage unit 603b corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be played. Alternatively, various information of the player is stored in the corresponding execution data storage section. Then, a game can be played on the pachinko machine 10 based on various information stored in the execution data storage unit.

As described above, the hall computer 600 of the fourth embodiment is configured to store the game points collectively as the game points instead of separately counting the game points and the awarded points as in the third embodiment. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately count the game points and the awarded points, and control for managing model-limited awarded points linked to the game history information 603a2 is unnecessary. It is possible to reduce the processing load in Further, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the third embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the game history information 603a2 and the retained awarded points 603a4 in the ROM 602, and the model-limited execution awarded points 603b3 in the RAM 603. , the memory capacity of the ROM 602 and/or the RAM 603 can be reduced, and the area for storing other information can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, when a game is played with the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D by the user's terminal device PC, and when the game is played with the pachinko machine 10 by going directly to the game hall D The flow and its display contents will be explained. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing transmission and reception of information among the pachinko machine 10, the video camera 701, the hall computer 600, and the user's terminal device PC in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the processing related to member registration, the processing based on the login request, the processing related to the purchase of game points, the processing related to the end of the game via the Internet, and the processing related to the gift exchange are the same as those in the second or third embodiment. Since they are equivalent, their description (or illustration) is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the user selects (clicks) the "model selection button" displayed on the "virtual hall screen" on condition that the user is logged in, the "gaming machine selection screen" (FIG. 41) is displayed. ) is displayed on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC. A user can select a pachinko machine 10 to play from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10 displayed on the "game machine selection screen" and installed in the game hall D by operating the terminal device PC. When a predetermined pachinko machine 10 is selected on the "gaming machine selection screen", a model selection request corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the hall computer 600. - 特許庁

When the pachinko machine 10 to be played is selected on this "game machine selection screen", a model selection request is transmitted to the hall computer 600, and the hall computer 600 responds to the model selection request and the usage status of the pachinko machine 10. to confirm. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-execution state (an unselected state of other users and players), the pachinko machine 10 can be used by any user or player. Since it has not been done, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a game permission signal to the hall computer 600, the video camera 701 is turned on, and transmission of image information of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is started. At this time, the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D is displayed as "playing" on the third symbol display device 81, suggesting that the player who went directly to the game hall D cannot execute the game. .

As shown in FIG. 53, the hall computer 600, which has received the game permission signal and the video information from the pachinko machine 10, is logged in and sends the request to the terminal device PC of the user who has sent the model selection request via the Internet. The video information received from the video camera 701 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted. The terminal device PC of the user that has received the video information from the hall computer 600 displays the current "game execution screen" of the pachinko machine 10 on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC based on the video information. The user can remotely operate the pachinko machine 10 (for example, shoot a ball) while confirming the state of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D using his/her own terminal device PC on the "game execution screen". becomes possible.

At this time, the game points held by the user are transmitted from the hall computer 600 to the terminal device PC.

Then, when the user selects (clicks) the "fire button image" while the "game execution screen" is being displayed on the monitor 900 of the user's terminal PC, the hole is sent from the terminal PC via the Internet. A game execution request is transmitted to the computer 600, which includes the shooting strength of the ball. After that, the hole computer 600 that has received the game execution request sets the firing intensity to the pachinko machine 10 responding to the game execution request only when the game points of the user stored in the hall computer 600 are present. Send a game execution request including

The pachinko machine 10, which has received the game execution request including the shooting intensity, shoots one ball with the shooting intensity corresponding to the game execution request, and execution result information indicating the game execution result indicating that the one ball has been shot. is transmitted to hall computer 600 . The hall computer 600 that has received the execution result information subtracts "1" from the execution game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b. At this time, when the shot ball wins a prize in one of the winning holes 64a or the like, a game value command (given points) corresponding to the number of prize balls is transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 600, and the game value Upon receiving the command, the hall computer 600 adds the game points corresponding to the game value command to the execution game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b.

After receiving the execution result information, the hall computer 600 transmits the execution result information to the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet (not shown in FIG. 59), and the terminal device PC receiving the execution result information updates the value of the "game point image" (that is, subtracts 1). Also, the hall computer 600 that has received the game value command transmits the game value command to the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet (not shown in FIG. 59), and the terminal device PC that received the game value command updates the value of the "game point image" (for example, adds 10) according to the game value command. Note that the fourth embodiment is configured so that the "point image" is not displayed.

In the fourth embodiment, when a player directly goes to a game hall D to play a game, a member card (not shown) held by the player is inserted into a card sandwich (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. ), the pachinko machine 10 can execute a game. Specifically, based on the member ID information stored in the member card, authentication with the member information storage unit 603a of the hall computer 600 is performed, and if the member card is successfully authenticated, the member information Balls can be shot from the pachinko machine 10 on condition that there are game points stored in the storage unit 603a. During execution of the game on the pachinko machine 10, the game result is accumulated in the member card. When the player ends the game at the pachinko machine 10, the remaining game points are stored (added) in the member information storage section 603a of the hall computer 600 by ejecting the member card.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, account processing (S4001), which is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by MPU 601 in hall computer 600 of the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this account processing (S4001). In the account processing (S4001) of the fourth embodiment, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet or directly at the game hall D, the game is played based on the game points managed by the hall computer 600. conduct. In addition, in the account processing (S4001) of the fourth embodiment, the description of the processing that is the same as that of the second or third embodiment will be omitted.

At S4151 of the account processing (S4001) of the fourth embodiment, the membership card corresponding to the user identified at S4104 is inserted into the card sandwich attached to one of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall D. If not (S4151: No), the player corresponding to the user is not playing a game at the pachinko machine in the game hall D, so that the member information storage unit The game points stored in the retained game points 603a3 of 603a are transmitted to the terminal device PC of the user (S4171), the account processing (S4001) is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 43) is performed.

In addition, in the process of S4154, if the user corresponding to the membership card has not performed account authentication from the terminal device PC (S4154: No), the user corresponding to the player of the membership card can play the game via the Internet. is not performed, in order to enable the game to be played on the pachinko machine 10, the game points stored in the retained game points 603a3 of the member information storage unit 603a are transferred to the card associated with the pachinko machine 10 into which the member card is inserted. The data is sent to Sand (S4172), the account processing (S4001) ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43).

Furthermore, in the processing of S4152, if it is determined that the membership card insertion information has not been received from the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 (S4152: No), then the membership card is inserted from the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10 is ejected to determine whether or not information on game points has been received (S4173). As a result of the determination, if the membership card has been discharged from the card sand attached to the pachinko machine 10 and the information regarding the game points has not been received (S4173: No), this account processing (S4001) is terminated and the main processing ( 43). On the other hand, if the member card is ejected from the card sand attached to the pachinko machine 10 and the information about the game points is received (S4173: Yes), the received game points are transferred to the player (user) corresponding to the member card. (S4174), the account processing (S4001) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 43).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to go directly to the game hall D and execute a game based on the game points stored in the member information storage unit 603a, and to play the game from the user's terminal device PC via the Internet. A single player (user) plays multiple pachinko machines 10 while making it possible to execute a game based on game points stored in a member information storage part 603a in the pachinko machine 10 installed in a hall D. It is possible to prevent a so-called multiplayer game in which

Next, a game execution process (S4003), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 601 in the hall computer 600, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the game execution process (S4003) of the fourth embodiment. In the game execution process (S4003) of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 selected by the user in the model selection process (S4002; see FIG. 45) executes a game-related process based on the game points.

In S4302 of the game execution process (S4003) of the fourth embodiment, when a game execution request is made from the user's terminal device PC on the game execution screen, that is, when "manual play button" is selected and "fire button image" is selected, or , If "0.6 seconds" have passed since the last shot of the ball when the "semi-auto play button" or "auto play button" was selected (S4302: Yes), then, as in the second embodiment, model-limited points are given. It is determined whether or not game points are stored in the execution game points 603b2 (S4304).

As a result of the determination, if game points are stored in the execution game points 603b2 in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where balls can be shot. A game execution instruction (request) including firing intensity data corresponding to the selected firing intensity is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. As a result, the pachinko machine 10, which has received the game execution request including the shooting intensity data and using the game points, shoots one ball with the intensity corresponding to the shooting intensity.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if no game points are stored in the execution game points 603b2 (S4304: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where balls cannot be shot, so the process of S4305 is skipped. The process moves to S4306. As a result, since balls cannot be shot from the pachinko machine 10 when there are no game points, it is possible to prevent a user who does not have game points from executing a game at the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Also, in S4306 of the game execution process (S4003) of the fourth embodiment, if the execution result information is received (S4306: Yes), it means that one ball has been shot in response to the game execution request. Unlike the second embodiment, the execution game point 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b is subtracted by "1" without determining whether or not there are model-limited imparted points (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4310. As a result, the game points owned by the user are subtracted based on the results of ball shooting from the pachinko machine 10 .

In the process of S4306, if the game execution result information is not received from the pachinko machine 10 that transmitted the game execution request (S4306: No), the process of S4308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4310.

Further, in the process of S4310 of the game execution process (S4003) of the fourth embodiment, if the game value data is received from the pachinko machine 10 (S4310: Yes), the number of prize balls included in the game value data The corresponding game points are added to the execution game points 603b2 of the game execution data storage unit 603b (S4351), the game execution process (S4003) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the game value data has not been received from the pachinko machine 10 (S4310: No), the process of S4351 is skipped, the game execution process (S4003) is terminated, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 43). return. As a result, the game points corresponding to the prize balls won by the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the hall computer 600.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, membership card game processing (S5053), which is one of command transmission/reception processing executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the membership card game process (S5053) of the fourth embodiment. In the membership card game process (S5053) of the fourth embodiment, a game is executed using the game points held by the player corresponding to the membership card without determining whether or not there are points to be given as in the second embodiment. When the membership card is ejected from the card slot, the game points owned by the player at that time are transmitted to the hall computer 600 without determining whether or not there are points to be awarded as in the second embodiment. to run.

In S5101 of the membership card game process (S5053) of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that the ball shooting condition is satisfied in the pachinko machine 10 (S5101: Yes), the ball is ready to be shot. First, it is determined whether or not the game points stored in the member card are greater than "0" (S5151).

As a result of determination, if the game points stored in the member card are greater than "0" (S5151: Yes), the ball can be shot with the game points owned by the player. A game point is subtracted according to a plurality of game modes with different game values for one shot (S5152), and a launch control command is set according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 currently held by the player. (S5105), the process proceeds to S5108.

Here, the game mode is a state in which the game value for one ball is different, as described above. , ``2 yen mode'' in which the game value for one ball is 2 game points, and ``1 yen mode'' in which the game value for one ball is 1 game point can be set. is configured to In the game in the game hall D, the game mode can be set by the player himself/herself by means of a predetermined operation means provided on the card sand attached to the pachinko machine 10 before the player starts playing with the pachinko machine 10. It is In addition, in the game by the terminal device PC via the Internet, the user can make settings on the "game execution screen".

Specifically, for example, if the player (user) has set the "4 yen mode", the game points are subtracted by "4" each time the ball is shot, and the player (user) has set the "4 yen mode". If the "2-yen mode" is set, the game points are subtracted by "2" each time the ball is shot, and if the player (user) sets the "1-yen mode", the ball is released. It is configured such that the game point is subtracted by "1" each time one shot is fired.

With this configuration, the player (user) can set the rate of the game played on the pachinko machine 10 by himself/herself, so that the game desired by the player (user) can be executed. A variety of games can be played at 10 .

Next, in S5108 of the membership card game process (S5053) of the fourth embodiment, if a predetermined winning ball has been generated by winning a ball in one of the winning openings 64a or the like (S5108: Yes), The game points corresponding to the number of prize balls and the game mode are added (S5153), and the process proceeds to S5110. As a result, the player can hold the prize balls acquired by the pachinko machine 10 as game points according to the game mode, and play a game with the game points. In the processing of S5108, if it is determined that no ball has entered any of the winning openings 64a, etc., and no winning ball has been generated (S5108: No), the processing of S5153 is skipped. The process proceeds to S5110.

In S5110 of the membership card game process (S5053) of the fourth embodiment, if there is a request to eject the membership card (S5110: Yes), the player has indicated that he or she intends to end the game on the pachinko machine 10. , information including game points owned by the player and stored in the membership card is transmitted to the hall computer 600 (S5154), the membership card game processing (S5053) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing. . On the other hand, if there is no request to eject the membership card (S5110: No), the process of S5154 is skipped, the membership card game process (S5053) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, when the game on the pachinko machine 10 ends, the game points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 and remaining can be managed by the hall computer 600.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, game points and imparted points are not counted separately as in the third embodiment, but are collectively stored as game points. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately count the game points and the awarded points, and control for managing model-limited awarded points linked to the game history information 603a2 is unnecessary. It is possible to reduce the processing load in Further, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the third embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the game history information 603a2 and the retained awarded points 603a4 in the ROM 602, and the model-limited execution awarded points 603b3 in the RAM 603. , the memory capacity of the ROM 602 and/or the RAM 603 can be reduced, and the area for storing other information can be increased.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the game in the game hall D, before the player starts the game with the pachinko machine 10, the player himself/herself sets by the predetermined operation means provided on the card sand attached to the pachinko machine 10. configured as possible. In addition, in the game by the terminal device PC via the Internet, the user can make settings on the "game execution screen". With this configuration, the player (user) can set the rate of the game played on the pachinko machine 10 by himself/herself, so that the game desired by the player (user) can be executed. A variety of games can be played at 10 .

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to authenticate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is legally sold by the gaming machine maker A by means of the main controller 110 and the authentication card 500. there is

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 with the terminal device PC via the Internet, the pachinko machine 10 side sends data about the manufacturing number SN to the hall computer 600 and the terminal device PC via the Internet. , and the terminal device PC, which has received the data regarding the serial number SN from the pachinko machine 10 side, confirms the consistency of the received data regarding the serial number SN with respect to the data server of the gaming machine manufacturer A via the Internet. is configured as

The fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the first to fourth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 63, a description will be given of a mode of use when the pachinko machine 10 manufactured by the game machine maker A according to the fifth embodiment is installed in the game hall D. FIG. FIG. 63 shows the flow of the pachinko machine 10 and the authentication card 500 in the game machine manufacturer A and the game hall D in the fifth embodiment, and the connection between the hall computer 600 in the game hall D and the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining that the terminal device PC of the user and the data server of the gaming machine maker A are configured to be connectable via the Internet.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the fifth embodiment, the data server of gaming machine maker A is connected to the Internet and is configured to be communicable with the terminal device PC of the user. Then, when the user's terminal device PC plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D, the pachinko machine 10 transmits data regarding the serial number SN to the terminal device PC via the Internet. The terminal device PC, which has received the data regarding the serial number SN, inquires of the data server of the gaming machine manufacturer A via the Internet whether the received serial number SN is legitimate (valid) data. Then, the data server of game machine maker A discriminates the consistency between the serial number SN of the inquiry and the serial number SN of the pachinko machine 10 managed by the data server, and the discrimination result is sent via the Internet. It is configured to be able to transmit to a terminal device PC that has made an inquiry via the Internet.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the flow of playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D by the user's terminal device PC will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the transmission and reception of information among the data server of gaming machine maker A, the pachinko machine 10, the video camera 701, the hall computer 600, and the user's terminal device PC in the fifth embodiment. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the flow of processing relating to prize exchange will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the processing related to member registration, the processing based on the login request, the processing related to the purchase of game points, the processing related to the end of the game via the Internet, and the processing related to the exchange of prizes are the same as those in any of the second to fourth embodiments. , the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 64, when the user selects (clicks) the "model selection button" displayed on the "virtual hall screen" on condition that the user is logged in, the "gaming machine selection screen" (FIG. 41) is displayed. ) is displayed on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC. A user can select a pachinko machine 10 to play from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10 displayed on the "game machine selection screen" and installed in the game hall D by operating the terminal device PC. When a predetermined pachinko machine 10 is selected on the “gaming machine selection screen”, a model selection request corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the hall computer 600 .

When the pachinko machine 10 to be played is selected on this "game machine selection screen", a model selection request is transmitted to the hall computer 600, and the hall computer 600 responds to the model selection request and the usage status of the pachinko machine 10. to confirm. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-execution state (an unselected state of other users and players), the pachinko machine 10 can be used by any user or player. Since it has not been done, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a game permission signal to the hall computer 600, the video camera 701 is turned on, and transmission of image information of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is started. At this time, the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D is displayed as "playing" on the third symbol display device 81, suggesting that the player who went directly to the game hall D cannot execute the game. .

As shown in FIG. 64, the hall computer 600, which has received the game permission signal and the video information from the pachinko machine 10, is logged in and sends the request to the terminal device PC of the user who has sent the model selection request via the Internet. The video information received from the video camera 701 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted. The terminal device PC of the user that has received the video information from the hall computer 600 displays the current "game execution screen" of the pachinko machine 10 on the monitor 900 of the terminal device PC based on the video information. The user can remotely operate the pachinko machine 10 (for example, shoot a ball) while confirming the state of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall D using his/her own terminal device PC on the "game execution screen". becomes possible.

At this time, in the fifth embodiment, from the pachinko machine 10, via the hall computer 600 and the Internet, to the terminal device PC of the user, serial number SN of the pachinko machine 10 (or / and game hall D information. Hereinafter, Similarly.) is transmitted. The terminal device PC, which has received the data regarding the serial number SN from the pachinko machine 10, sends the received data regarding the serial number SN to the data server of the game machine maker A via the Internet. An inquiry (authentication) is made as to whether or not it is the machine 10 . The data server of gaming machine maker A, which has received the data on the serial number SN from the terminal device PC, stores the sales destination gaming hall and serial number SN of the pachinko machine 10 managed by the data server itself, and the received data on the serial number SN. It authenticates whether or not it matches, and transmits the result of the authentication as an inquiry result to the terminal device PC that transmitted the data related to the serial number SN via the Internet.

Specifically, if the serial number SN is matched, the official information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been legally sold is transmitted to the terminal device PC, while the serial number SN is matched. If not, non-legal information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is not legally sold is transmitted to the terminal device PC. When the terminal device PC receives the authorized information, the terminal device PC notifies that the pachinko machine 10 is legally sold by the game machine manufacturer A, and the pachinko machine 10 that is about to play a game is managed by the game machine manufacturer A. It can be recognized that the pachinko machine 10 is legally sold below. On the other hand, when the non-authorized information is received, it is informed that the pachinko machine 10 is not legally sold by the game machine maker A, and the pachinko machine 10 to be played is distributed outside the control of the game machine maker A. It can be recognized that it is a pachinko machine 10 that has been played. In this case, the given points acquired in the game in the pachinko machine 10 receiving the official information can be used in the game in the game hall D, and can also be exchanged for prizes in the game hall D or the game machine maker A. While set to , the points awarded in the game at the pachinko machine 10 receiving the non-genuine information cannot be used in the game at the game hall D, and the points at the game hall D or the game machine maker A Disallow the exchange of prizes. By constructing in this way, only the pachinko machine 10 legally sold under the control of the game machine maker A can be played normally via the Internet, and the games on the pachinko machine 10 are diversified. , can be encouraged to play games on the pachinko machine 10 managed by the game machine maker A. As a result, when a game machine maker unintended fraudulent act or illegal resale is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from performing a normal game, thereby reducing the disadvantage of the gaming hall due to the fraudulent act. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that the machine manufacturer cannot manage.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed. For example, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

Further, it is of course possible to combine each configuration of each of the above-described embodiments with one of the configurations of the modifications shown below. Furthermore, it is of course possible to combine any one of the configurations of the modifications shown below with each configuration of one or a plurality of other modifications. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1: Incorporation of Encryption Device or Decryption Device>
In the above embodiment, in addition to the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 are provided, and the control command CC transmitted from the main control device 110 is encrypted. encrypted and multiplexed to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 via the multiplexing device 300, and transmitted as a multiplexed command MECC received from the sub-controller 113 to the decoding device 400; The decoding device 400 separates and decodes the multiplexed command MECC, extracts the control command CC, and transmits it to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 of the transmission source. On the other hand, the function of the encryption device 300 may be incorporated in the main controller 110 or the function of the decryption device 400 may be incorporated in the sub-controllers 111 and 113 . By configuring in this way, the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced more than when the encryption device 300 and/or the decryption device 400 are configured separately from the main controller 110 and/or the sub-controllers 111 and 113. As a result, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 2: Decryption device and/or encryption device placed in frame>
In the above embodiment, the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 are mounted on the back side of the game board 13 . On the other hand, at least the frame side (the outer frame 11, the inner frame 12, or the front frame 14) may be configured to mount the decryption device 400, or the frame side may have the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400. may be configured to be mounted together. With this configuration, the number of parts required for the decryption device 400 (the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400) can be reduced when only the game board 13 is replaced from the pachinko machine 10 in the case of so-called board replacement. can. Therefore, the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced compared to the case where the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 are mounted on the game board 13, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 3: Encryption method>
In the above-described embodiment, the control command CC is encrypted and decrypted using a so-called common key cryptosystem. Alternatively, the control command CC may be encrypted and decrypted using public key cryptography.

<Modification 4: Encryption on the most upstream side, decryption on the most downstream side>
In the above embodiment, the control command CC output from the main controller 110, which is the most upstream side in the flow of the control command CC, is encrypted, and the device at the most downstream side of the flow of the control command CC (for example, the launch control device 112 and the display control device 114) can receive the decoded control command CC in the sub-controllers 111 and 113 upstream. On the other hand, the encrypted control command CC output from the main control device 110 is configured to be able to receive the decrypted control command CC in the most downstream device in the flow of the control command CC. The sub-controllers 111 and 113 arranged on the upstream side of the device may be configured to transmit the encrypted control command CC to the device on the most downstream side without decrypting it.

<Modification 5: Encrypted Command and Unencrypted Command>
In the above embodiment, all control commands CC transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 are encrypted and multiplexed. On the other hand, among the control commands CC transmitted from the main control device 110, it is also possible to transmit the encrypted control commands and the non-encrypted control commands separately according to the importance of the game. good. Specifically, for example, a command with a high degree of importance regarding the game, that is, a prize ball command that indicates the number of prize balls, a launch control command, a variation pattern command that executes a variation effect, a stop type command, etc., are important for the game result. Since it has an effect, it is configured to be encrypted and transmitted to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 . On the other hand, commands with a low degree of importance related to games, ie, demo commands and confirmation commands, are configured to be transmitted to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 without being encrypted because they do not greatly affect the game results. In addition, when a fraudulent act is committed, an error command for stopping the execution of the game or notifying that the fraudulent act has been committed is also required to promptly deal with the fraudulent act, so it is encrypted. It transmits to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 without With this configuration, the sub-controllers 111 and 113 do not need to decode the control commands CC having a low degree of importance for the game, so that the control load on the sub-controllers 111 and 113 can be reduced. can be done. Further, when a fraudulent act is committed, it is possible to immediately deal with the fraudulent act, so that each process for the fraudulent act can be reliably executed.

<Modification 6: Control Device Receiving Encrypted Control Command and Control Device Receiving Unencrypted Control Command>
In the above embodiment, the control command CC for both the payout control device 111 and the sub-control device 113 is encrypted and multiplexed and transmitted. On the other hand, the control device that receives the encrypted control command CC and the control device that receives the non-encrypted control command CC may be configured separately. Specifically, for example, the control command CC for the payout control device 111 that pays out the game value to the player is configured to be encrypted and multiplexed and transmitted to the payout control device 111, while the game result is transmitted to the payout control device 111. A control command CC for the sound lamp control device 113, which has only a notification function and does not affect the game value for the player, is configured to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 without being encrypted (multiplexed). With this configuration, at least the audio ramp control device 113 does not need to decode the control command CC, so the control load on the audio ramp control device 113 and the decoding device 400 can be reduced. .

<Modification 7: Enclosed Pachinko>
In the above-described embodiment, a ball is introduced from the upper tray, the ball is shot, and when the ball wins a prize in a predetermined prize-winning slot, a prize ball is paid out based on the prize-winning, and the ball does not win any of the prize-winning slots. A pachinko machine 10 that discharges balls from an out port 66 to an island facility is used for missing balls. On the other hand, when a ball introduced from the upper tray enters a predetermined prize-winning slot or passes through the out slot 66, it has a function of circulating the ball to the upper tray and circulating the ball in the pachinko machine. A so-called enclosed pachinko machine 10 may be used. Since the enclosed pachinko machine has a function of constantly quantifying and managing the number of shot balls and the number of winning balls, the game is played based on the remote control from the user's terminal PC via the Internet. suitable for the occasion.

<Modification 8: Medal-less slot>
Similarly, a so-called medal-less slot machine may be used in which a game is played based on electronic information based on the number of medals stored in credits without allowing the player to use actual medals.

<Modification 9: Authentication is possible by operating the pachinko machine>
In the above-described embodiment, when a game is played in the game hall D using game points or the like stored in the hall computer 600, the player inserts the membership card owned by the player into the card sandwich attached to the pachinko machine 10, and performs predetermined authentication. After that, the player is specified, and a game based on the game points or the like possessed by the player can be executed. On the other hand, an authentication function is provided in the pachinko machine 10 to authenticate the player without using the member card or the like belonging to the player, and the player is authenticated based on the successful authentication in the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to be able to execute a game based on the game points or the like that are specified and owned by the player. By constructing in this way, equipment for card sand becomes unnecessary, and the operation and management costs in the game hall D can be reduced. Authentication methods for the pachinko machine 10 include, for example, password authentication, biometric authentication such as fingerprint authentication, face authentication, and vein authentication.

<Modification 10: Authentication method other than authentication card>
In the above embodiment, the authentication card 500 issued by the game machine maker A is inserted into the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400 of the pachinko machine 10, and the authentication card 500 is officially issued under the control of the game machine maker A. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the encrypted control command CC can be normally decrypted when the control command CC is encrypted. On the other hand, it may be configured to authenticate that the pachinko machine 10 is legally distributed from the game machine maker A by a predetermined authentication method other than the authentication card 500 . Specifically, for example, the position information (so-called GPS) function of the pachinko machine 10 is installed, and the position information is transmitted to the game machine maker A via the hall computer 600 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. By doing so, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed, and the store information of the game hall D is registered in advance in the data server of the game machine maker A, and the sales destination information of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the data server. The hall computer 600 outputs the registered sales destination information to the hall computer 600 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the hall computer 600 receives the sales destination information. Send to A. If the authentication information is normal, the data server of the gaming machine maker A that has received the authentication information transmits the game permission information to the pachinko machine 10 via the hall computer 600 and receives the game permission information. The pachinko machine 10 is constructed so as to be able to execute a normal game based on the above.

<Modification 11: Authentication Timing>
In the above embodiment, the decryption device 400 is configured to read and decrypt the master key Km of the authentication card 500 each time the multiplexed command MECC is received when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. On the other hand, the decrypting device 400 may be configured to read the master key Km of the authentication card 500 when the power is turned on, and perform decryption with the master key Km until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. good. Further, the master key Km may be read every time the game state is changed, every predetermined time period, or every predetermined game execution (for example, every 100 variations). With this configuration, it is not necessary to read the master key Km each time the multiplexing command MECC is received, so the control load of the decryption device 400 can be reduced.

<Modification 12: Multiplexing type>
In the above embodiment, as a method of generating the multiplexed command MECC, the control command CC is multiplied by the encrypted scramble key EKs and the encrypted work key EKw to synthesize the command. It employs code division multiplexing, in which signals are combined and transmitted. On the other hand, frequency division multiplexing (FDM) which allocates different frequencies to a plurality of data (that is, encryption control command ECC, encryption scramble key EKs and encryption work key EKw; hereinafter the same). Alternatively, the multiplexing command MECC may be generated by time division multiplexing (TDM) in which different timings are assigned to a plurality of data.

<Modification 13: Sending Separate Decryption Keys for Consecutive Multiple Commands>
In the above embodiment, encryption and decryption are performed for each control command CC. On the other hand, a plurality of control commands CC (for example, variation pattern command and stop type command, or reserved ball number command and read-ahead command), the decryption key of the previously output control command CC may be included in the later output control command CC. By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 14: Encrypting Commands for Devices Directly Managed by Main Control Device>
In the above embodiment, the control command CC transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers 111 and 113 is encrypted and decrypted. On the other hand, devices directly managed by the main control device 110, that is, instructions (signals) to the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, and the variable winning device 65 are also configured to be encrypted and decrypted. You may By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 15: Generate a work key from the serial number of the authentication card each time a command is received>
In the above embodiment, the serial number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the encryption device 300, and the encryption device 300 generates the work key Kw based on the receipt of the serial number command, and the pachinko machine 10 The control command CC is encrypted based on the generated work key Kw until the power is turned off. In response to this, the main controller 110 transmits information about the manufacturing number to the encryption device 300 each time a control command CC is generated, and the encryption device 300 sends The work key may be generated based on the transmitted serial number information. With this configuration, when the main control device 110 is illegally replaced after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from executing normal games, and fraudulent behavior is suppressed. You can increase the effect.

<Modification 16: Decoding Order of Simultaneous Reception>
In the above embodiment, the decoding device 400 is configured to be able to receive multiplexed commands MECC from a plurality of sub-controllers 111 and 113, and is configured to decode the multiplexed commands MECC according to the order of reception. On the other hand, when a plurality of multiplexed commands MECC are received simultaneously from a plurality of sub-controllers 111 and 113, the multiplexed commands MECC may be decoded according to a predetermined priority order. As a predetermined priority order, for example, the multiplexed command MECC from the payout control device 111 that executes processing related to the awarding of game value, and the multiplex command MECC from the sound ramp control device 113 that does not execute processing directly related to the awarding of game value. It may be configured to be processed with priority over the multiplexed command MECC. By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly perform control regarding the provision of game values. Further, the multiplexed command MECC from the sound lamp control device 113 which does not have a backup function may be processed preferentially over the payout control device 111 which has a backup function. By configuring in this way, even if the power is turned off during transmission/reception of the multiplexed command MECC and the decoded control command CC, the sub-controllers 111 and 113 execute consistent control. It becomes possible to

<Modification 17: Connection Method of Encryption Device>
The connection method of the main controller 110 and the encryption device 300 may be configured to be different from the connection method of the encryption device 300 and the sub-controllers 111 and 113 . Specifically, for example, the connector between the main controller 110 and the encryption device 300 has 16 connection pins, while the connection connector between the encryption device 300 and the sub-controllers 111 and 113 has 16 pins. 24 pins are provided so that the main controller 110 and the sub-controllers 111 and 113 cannot be directly connected. By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 18: Sub-controller executes processing only with command from decoding device>
The sub-controllers 111 and 113 execute various controls only with commands sent from the decryption device 400, and when receiving a control command CC from another device (for example, the main controller 110 or the encryption device 300) , various controls may not be executed depending on the control command CC. Specifically, for example, when a decoded control command CC is transmitted from the decoding device 400 to the sub-controllers 111 and 113, the sub-controllers 111, 113, 111, 113, 111, 113, 113, 113, 113, 113, 113, 113, and 1111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111, and 111i, and including the decoding device 400 as the transmission source. 113 discriminates the information of the transmission source, and only when the transmission source is the decoding device 400, it regards the control command CC as normal and executes control. By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 19: Multiplexing a plurality of commands>
In the above embodiment, encryption and multiplexing are performed for each control command CC to generate the multiplexed command MECC. On the other hand, it may be configured such that a plurality of (for example, two) control commands CC are put together to generate one multiplexed command MECC. Specifically, for example, the encryption device 300 that has received the control commands CC that are continuously generated (transmitted) based on one event (for example, start-up winning) encrypts the two control commands CC, respectively. Then, it multiplexes and transmits one multiplexing command MECC. By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 20: Encryption/Decryption of Commands Exchanged Between Audio Lamp Control Device and Display Control Device>
In the above embodiment, the control commands CC exchanged between the main controller 110 and the sub-controllers 111 and 113 are configured to be encrypted and decrypted. On the other hand, the control commands exchanged between the sub-controllers 111 and 113 and their downstream control devices (so-called sub-sub-controllers: the firing control device 112 and the display control device 114) are encrypted and decrypted. It may be configured to be By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 21: Initialization (Startup) of Encryption Device and Decryption Device by Command from Main Control Device>
In the above embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110, the encryption device 300 and the decryption device 400 are configured to individually execute startup processing and start up respectively. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 transmits a start-up command to the encryption device and/or the decryption device 400, and until the start-up command is received, the encryption device 300 and/or The decoding device 400 may be configured so as not to start up normally. By configuring in this way, the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Modification 22: Limited Use of Granted Points>
In the above embodiment, the points given to the user are restricted to be used on the pachinko machine 10 on which the game was played. On the other hand, the points may be used by adding other usage conditions. Specifically, for example, the points may be used only when the game is continued on the pachinko machine 10 that has acquired the points, or the points may be used on the day the points are acquired or for a predetermined period (for example, one week). ) may be configured so that the given points can only be used, or the pachinko machine 10 that has earned the given points can be used in the pachinko machine of the same type as the pachinko machine 10 that has earned the given points. It may be configured so that it can be used with a pachinko machine sold by the manufacturer of the game machine. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by realizing various game characteristics.

<Modification 23: Invalidation of operation within firing interval with continuous operation of firing button image>
In the above embodiment, when a ball is shot from the terminal device PC to the pachinko machine 10 via the Internet, if the "manual play button" is selected, the "shoot button image" is displayed within "0.6 seconds". is operated multiple times (e.g., three times) in succession, the number of balls (e.g., three shots) corresponding to the multiple operations are fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds". ing. On the other hand, if the "fire button image" is operated multiple times (for example, three times) within "0.6 seconds", one ball based on the first operation is fired, and the other operations are performed. It may be configured to prevent (disable) the launch of the ball based on With such a configuration, even if the "shooting button image" is continuously operated due to a user's operation error, only one ball is shot, thereby improving the operability of the game through the terminal device PC. can do.

<Modification 24: You can play in the virtual hall even outside the business hours of the game hall>
In the above-described embodiment, there are business hours during which the pachinko machine 10 can be played directly at the game hall D, and connectable hours during which the pachinko machine 10 can be played via the terminal device PC via the Internet. are set to the same time. On the other hand, business hours during which the player can directly go to the game hall D and play a game with the pachinko machine 10, and a connectable time during which the player can play with the pachinko machine 10 via the terminal device PC via the Internet. You may comprise so that it may shift. Specifically, for example, the operating hours of the game hall D are set from 9:00 to 22:00, while the operating hours of the virtual hall 700 are set from 12:00 to 24:00. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by realizing various game characteristics.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, the hall computer 600, or the terminal device PC are each electrically connected by wire connection. Configure. On the other hand, some or all of the electrical connections in the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the encryption device 300, the decryption device 400, the hall computer 600, or the terminal device PC, Each of them may be configured to be performed by wireless communication. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to consider the wiring configuration between various devices capable of wireless communication, so the wiring design can be simplified.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, the authentication card 500 is inserted into the card insertion hole 410 provided in the decryption device 400, and based on the various information stored in the authentication card 500, the sub-controllers 111 and 113 It is arranged to demultiplex and decode the transmitted multiplexing commands MECC. Here, it may be configured to regulate, restrict or prohibit the removal of the authentication card 500 inserted into the card insertion hole 410 of the decryption device 400 . Specifically, for example, when the authentication card 500 is inserted into the card insertion hole 410, a locking mechanism is provided to prevent the authentication card 500 from being pulled out. The authentication card 500 may be configured such that it cannot be removed from the card insertion hole 410 unless the operation or part or all of the decryption device 400 is destroyed. As a result, unauthorized modification and diversion of the authentication card 500 can be suppressed, and misuse of the authentication card 500 can be suppressed.

<Modification 27>
Further, it may be configured such that the authentication card 500 once inserted into the card insertion hole 410 and then pulled out becomes unusable. Specifically, for example, when the authentication card 500 is once inserted into the card insertion hole 410 and then removed, the validity of any information on the removed authentication card 500 is lost (that is, the validity of the expiration date information ED). or the serial number SN or the master key Km cannot be accessed).

<Modification 28>
In the above-described embodiment, the awarded points earned in the game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 can be used on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700, or even without going directly to the game hall D. It is configured so that prizes can be exchanged. On the other hand, given points acquired in the game on the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 can be used only when the game is played by going directly to the game hall D, or if the player does not go directly to the game hall D, the prize can be exchanged. It may be configured so that it is not possible. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to go directly to the game hall D, and the effect of attracting customers in the game hall D can be enhanced.

<Modification 29>
In the above-described embodiment, the awarded points earned by the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 and the awarded points earned by playing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D can be played and exchanged for prizes at the same value. It is On the other hand, a difference may be provided between the awarded points acquired through the game in the virtual hall 700 and the awarded points acquired through the game in the game hall D. Specifically, for example, the points earned in the game in the virtual hall D can be used at half value in the game in the game hall D, or the points earned in the game in the virtual hall 700 can be used in the game. It may be configured such that the exchange rate for prize exchange is about 1/3 of the points awarded in the game in Hall D. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a difference between the game in the game hall D and the game in the virtual hall 700, thereby diversifying the game.

<Modification 30>
In the above-described embodiment, it is configured such that the awarded points earned in the games on the pachinko machines 10 in the virtual hall 700 and the game hall D can be used in the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, a slot machine is installed in the virtual hall 700 and/or the game hall D, and the given points obtained in the game on the pachinko machine 10 in the virtual hall 700 and the game hall D can be used in the slot machine. may be configured. In this case, when using the given points acquired in the game on the pachinko machine 10 in the slot machine, it is set so that 5 balls are required to use 1 medal (5 balls can be used for 1 medal). set). By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by realizing various game characteristics.

<Modification 31>
In the above embodiment, the encrypted and multiplexed control command CC cannot be normally separated and decrypted when the pairing between the main controller 110 and the authentication card 500 does not match. On the other hand, the main controller 110 is provided with a function to identify the authentication card 500, and when the pairing between the main controller 110 and the authentication card 500 does not match, the main controller 110 is not normally controlled. good too. Specifically, the main controller 110 is configured to be able to read the authentication card 500, and when the pairing between the main controller 110 and the authentication card 500 does not match, the master controller 110 does not acquire the pass/fail random number. , may be configured not to output the control command CC from the main control device 110, or may be configured to be regarded as an abnormal state and notify the abnormality or stop the game.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, the authentication card 500 issued by the game machine maker A is inserted into the card insertion hole 410 to determine the compatibility between the main controller 110 and the authentication card 500 . On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an input device capable of inputting a password, and authentication may be performed by inputting the password issued by the gaming machine maker A into the input device.

<Modification 33>
In the above embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the serial number SN is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the encryption device 300, and the authentication card 500 is read each time a control command CC is received to encrypt the control command CC. It is configured to perform encryption and decryption. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it may communicate with the data server of the gaming machine manufacturer A via the hall computer 600 to authenticate whether the pachinko machine 10 is legitimate. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the authentication card 500 and the like becomes unnecessary, and the parts cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 34>
The expiration date of the authentication card 500 may be configured to be notified to the people involved in the game hall D. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the expiration date information ED of the authentication card 500 is read, and the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall computer 600 detects the expiration date or the remaining period until the expiration date. It may be configured to notify the period.

<Modification 35>
In the above-described embodiment, the virtual hall 700 is provided in the gaming hall D, and the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall 700 can be played on the user's terminal device PC via the Internet. On the other hand, the game machine maker A may provide a virtual hall, and the pachinko machine 10 installed in the virtual hall may be configured to be playable on the terminal device PC of the user via the Internet. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the need for authentication as to whether the pachinko machine 10 is a genuine product. In this case, in order not to hinder the business of the game hall D, for example, as an advertisement (promotion) of the pachinko machine 10 before installation in the game hall D, the virtual hall is operated until it is installed in the game hall D. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 that has passed the certification period, which is the period during which it can be installed in the game hall D, may be installed in the virtual hall and operated.

<Modification 36>
In the above-described embodiment, when a game is being executed on the pachinko machine 10 by the terminal device PC, the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D displays the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 2227, etc., and the game by the terminal device PC is displayed. is being executed and the game is being executed, suggesting that the game cannot be played. On the other hand, when a game is played on the terminal device PC, the display device used for the game (that is, the third symbol display device 81 and the lamp display device 227) within the range photographed by the video camera 700 In this case, the game execution notification is not performed, and the game execution notification is performed in a range not photographed by the video camera 700 or in a display device (for example, the frequency display unit 41 or the abnormality notification lamp) that is not used in the normal game. may be configured to do so. By configuring in this way, in the game hall D in which both the game hall D and the terminal device PC can be played, the user playing the game in the terminal device PC is in the same state as playing in the game hall D. In addition, the player in the game hall D can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 cannot be used to play a game.

<Modification 37>
The shooting angle of a video camera 700 is used for shooting a game device used for a game without being hindered by a player even when the player stands in front of the pachinko machine 10 or sits on a chair. It may be configured to allow With this configuration, even if a player is present in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D, the user who is playing the game with the terminal device PC can play the game in the game hall D. A game can be played while visually recognizing the display content equivalent to the state in which

<Modification 38>
In the above embodiment, the authentication card 500 stores the serial number SN, the master key Km, and the expiration date information ED, and each time the decryption device 400 receives the multiplexed command MECC, is decrypting. On the other hand, the store information of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the authentication card 500, and the location information function (so-called GPS) is installed in the decryption device 400, and the store information of the authentication card 500 is the location information that should be installed. , the validity of the authentication card 500 is maintained. may be configured to lose the By configuring in this way, if it is a legitimate sales destination managed by the gaming machine manufacturer A, it is possible to decrypt the multiplexed command MECC using the valid authentication card 500, but the gaming machine manufacturer A does not know it. If so, it is possible to invalidate the authentication card 500 and prevent it from decoding the multiplexed command MECC. Therefore, only the pachinko machine 10 properly managed by the game machine maker A can be operated normally, so that the effect of deterring fraud can be improved.

<Modification 39>
In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 shoots a ball in response to a shooting instruction from the terminal device PC, the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that does not necessarily result in a foul ball. On the other hand, when a ball is shot from the pachinko machine 10 in response to a shooting instruction from the terminal device PC, the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that can result in a foul ball (for example, the entire range in which the player can operate the operation handle 51). In the unlikely event that the ball becomes a foul ball, it is detected that a foul ball (a ball that did not reach the play area) has occurred (for example, the ball between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is A foul ball detection switch that does not detect when the ball is heading toward the game area (i.e., upward direction) and detects when the ball is heading toward the opposite side of the game area (i.e., flowing direction) may be provided. good. If a ball is detected by this foul ball detection switch, it means that the ball could not be properly fired according to the shooting instruction, so the game points held by the player are restored (for example, for one foul ball, , the game point is restored to "1"). By constructing in this way, even when a foul ball is generated, the ball used in the game by the player can be treated properly, and the player is prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages. can be done.

<Modification 40>
In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 shoots a ball in response to a shooting instruction from the terminal device PC, the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that does not necessarily result in a foul ball. On the other hand, if the operating handle 51 is degraded due to deterioration over time, etc., and the firing intensity based on the physical operation of the operating handle 51 is reduced, and a foul ball can be generated, the terminal When a game is played by the device PC, the firing intensity of the operation handle 51 may be detected, and calculation may be performed according to the detection result to compensate (enhance) the firing performance. With such a configuration, even when a game is played by the terminal device PC, the balls are easily made to reach the game area, making it difficult for foul balls to occur, reducing the processing related to foul balls, and realizing the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko hall. The control load of the computer 600 can be reduced.

<Modification 41>
In the above-described embodiment, when playing a game using the terminal device PC, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to shoot balls based on the game points held by the player, and when the ball is shot from the pachinko machine 10, the game points is configured to subtract On the other hand, when a game is played on the terminal device PC, the ball is shot from the pachinko machine 10 while the ball is shot from the pachinko machine 10 based on the game points held by the player. The game points may be subtracted when the ball is detected by any of the switches of the winning opening 64a or the like or the out switch of the out opening 66. By configuring in this way, for example, when a phenomenon in which the balls are clogged in the game area (so-called grape state) occurs, the balls flow into one of the winning openings 64a or the like or the out opening 66 and the game is stopped. The game points are properly processed based on the proper execution, and it is possible to prevent the game points of the player from being reduced only by shooting the ball.

<Modification 42>
In the above-described embodiment, when a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10 by the terminal device PC, the account management prevents the game from being played on another pachinko machine 10 in the gaming hall D. On the other hand, when a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10 by the terminal device PC, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that balls cannot be shot, and the game on the pachinko machine 10 may be disabled. . Specifically, for example, when a game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the terminal device PC, a lock mechanism is operated to physically disable the operation handle 51 in the pachinko machine 10, and the operation handle 51 may be configured to be non-rotatable, and even if the operating handle 51 is rotated, the resistance of a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 based on the rotation is detected by a change in electrical resistance It may be configured so that the value does not change to disable ball shooting, or even if the operating handle 51 is rotated, the shooting control device 112 is instructed to operate the handle 51 to shoot the ball. It may be configured not to output the signal or to regulate the processing based on the ball launch signal. By configuring in this way, when a game is being executed on the pachinko machine 10 by the terminal device PC, the game on the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall D is made unexecutable, and the game on the terminal device PC and the game hall D are performed. It is possible to prevent the game from being executed at the same time, reduce the control load of the pachinko machine 10, etc., and prevent the player from being confused.

In the above embodiment, in the lottery of each special symbol, any one of the "10R probability variable jackpot", "4R probability variable jackpot", "10R short-time jackpot", and "4R short-time jackpot" is configured to be given. . On the other hand, a lottery for a big win different from the big win (for example, a so-called "sudden variable probability big win (2R variable probability big win)") or a "small win" different from the big win may be performed. By configuring in this way, when the player wins a big win or a small win, the game value given to the player is made different, thereby providing variations in the game and realizing a variety of game characteristics, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved.

In particular, when a "small win" is provided in the lottery of special symbols, when the small win is won, the opening and closing mode of the variable winning device 65 etc. similar or similar to the big win to which the "latency probability fluctuation state" is given (that is, If it is a "5R latent probability variable jackpot", the "5R latent probability variable jackpot" is executed by opening and closing the variable winning device 65 five times in the same way as the "5R latent probability variable jackpot"). It is difficult to distinguish between "state" and "latent probability change state". By constructing in this way, a game feature that makes the player guess which game state it is in is created, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the "small win" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 etc. is executed, but unlike the "10R probability variable big win" and "5R latent probability variable big win", the game state transition is not executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, after the end of the big win, the so-called loop-type game specification is used to maintain the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big win occurs. On the other hand, as the "probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the big win reaches a predetermined number, and the "probability fluctuation state" ends after the predetermined number of times. It may be configured with a so-called ST type game specification.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, during the variable performance of the third symbol (special symbol) that is held and executed with the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning) as a trigger, there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit. A case has been described in which whether or not there is a "suspended change notice" is performed in the executed symbols and the suspended symbols. On the other hand, whether or not there is a win (stop with "○" symbol) in the variable display of normal symbols that is suspended and executed with the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning) In addition, using the normal symbol holding lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., together with whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol, or instead, the player is notified. You may Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the normal symbols being held or in the variable display of the normal symbols being executed and held. Therefore, it can be guessed whether or not the normal symbol will win before execution of the variable display of the normal symbol. Among game machines, there is a game machine which enhances game performance by the presence or absence of winning of normal symbols, and it is particularly effective in such a game machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the demo effect is described as stopping display of the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numbers "0" to "9", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed has explained the case of executing the "suspended change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect. A fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth pattern display device is caused to display the fourth pattern together with the variation performance executed by the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Executes a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect” including “hold change notice”) that is executed across multiple variable effects, unlike “hold change notice” or “hold change notice” You may In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various performances, and by operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance, continuous advance notice performance is executed. good too. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect (dynamic display) is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the predetermined character is displayed. , outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33 can make the player expect a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the action of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that a continuous announcement effect is performed, so that a different effect than usual is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect in the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect in the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), the game state after the end of the continuous notice production ("10R probability variable jackpot", "10R latent probability variable jackpot", "10R short time jackpot", "5R latent probability variable jackpot", "5R short time It is also possible to prepare a plurality of continuous announcement effect modes that are selected according to "jackpot", "loss").

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning is included as it is and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 for the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of the A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is four. It is not limited to the number of times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls of the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is displayed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by numbers or by dividing the area into four. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is controlled by the light-emitting member. may be configured to notify the

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable effect, which is the variable display of the third pattern, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as the identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the variable display of the symbols is not limited to the variable rendering of the symbols. Display is also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third design.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize it has been described. Instead, all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size to an unrecognizable degree, or all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are displayed at random. good too.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays the identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine, management device, or gaming system of the present invention are shown.
<Group A: A game machine can be played by authenticating with a manufacturer-issued authentication card>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction is provided in the game area to change the flow direction of the game ball. Predetermined game values are given based on the entry of a game ball into any one of a plurality of ball entrances in which changing means are arranged, and a win-or-fail lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific ball entrance. , when winning in an advantageous state such as winning in the lottery, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-112444)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to enhance the effect of deterring cheating, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of deterring cheating.

In a game machine for playing a game using a predetermined game medium (for example, a ball),
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game;
Unique information storage means (eg, serial number storage unit 202j) for storing unique information (eg, serial number SN) uniquely assigned to the main control means;
Sub-control means (for example, payout control device 111 or sound lamp control device 113) capable of executing various controls based on control information (control command CC) output from the main control means;
Unique information determining means (for example, decryption device 400 and authentication card 500) for determining the unique information stored in the unique information storage means;
regulation means (for example, not decrypting an encrypted control command CC) for regulating execution of various controls based on the control information when the unique information determination means determines that the unique information is not normal; A gaming machine A0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A0, a game is played using a predetermined game medium, the game is controlled by the main control means, and unique information uniquely assigned to the main control means is stored in the unique information storage means. remembered. Also, the sub-control means can execute various controls based on the control information output from the main control means. Here, the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is discriminated by the unique information discriminating means, and when the unique information discriminating means discriminates that the unique information is not normal, the restricting means performs various controls based on the control information. is regulated. As a result, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, various controls in the game machine can be regulated due to different unique information, thereby enhancing the effect of deterring fraudulent activity. has the effect of being able to

In addition, "regulating the execution of various controls" means, for example, when not performing various controls by not receiving control information normally, when not performing various controls by discarding control information, or when not performing a game A case where various controls are not executed by stopping or canceling is exemplified.

In gaming machine A0,
The unique information determination means is
Corresponding information storage means (for example, IC chip 501 of authentication card 500) for storing correspondence information (for example, serial number storage section 501a and master key storage section 501b) corresponding to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means and,
Correspondence determination means (for example, separation and decoding processing (S3002)) for determining whether the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal,
The sub control means is
A gaming machine A1 characterized in that, when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, various controls based on the control information are executed.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the correspondence information corresponding to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is stored by the correspondence information storage means provided in the unique information determination means, and the correspondence relationship determination means also provided in the unique information determination means, It is determined whether or not the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal. When the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, the sub-control means executes various controls based on the control information. As a result, when the correspondence relationship between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determination means is normal, the control means does not restrict the execution of the control information. control can be exercised. Therefore, if the main control means and the unique information determining means are legitimate, the game can be played normally. There is an effect that various controls in the machine can be regulated, and the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In gaming machine A1,
The sub control means is
The game machine A2 is characterized in that, when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal, the regulation means prevents execution of various controls based on the control information.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal, the restriction means does not perform various controls based on the control information in the sub-control means. Accordingly, when the correspondence relationship between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determining means is not normal, the restricting means restricts the execution of the control information, thereby executing various controls. I can't. Therefore, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, various controls in the gaming machine can be regulated due to different unique information, and the effect of deterring fraudulent activity can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
processing means (for example, encryption device 300) for processing the control information output from the main control means into processed information based on the unique information;
a restoration means (for example, S3106 to S3110 of the separation and decoding process (S3002)) for restoring the processed information processed by the processing means to the control information based on the correspondence information;
The sub control means is
A gaming machine A3 characterized in that various controls equivalent to the control information are not executed based on the processing information.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the processing means processes the control information output from the main control means into processed information based on the unique information, and the restoring means transforms the processed information processed by the processing means into control information based on the correspondence information. Restored. Then, the sub control means is configured not to execute various controls equivalent to the control information based on the processing information. That is, if the correspondence between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determination means is not normal, the control information that is processed information cannot be restored. The means cannot execute various controls equivalent to the control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means has been remodeled due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls in the game machine due to the different unique information, thereby enhancing the effect of deterring fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines A0 to A3,
A gaming machine A4, wherein the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is configured to be unrewritable.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is configured to be unrewritable. As a result, it is possible to prevent violation of the regulation by the regulation means due to rewriting of the unique information due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent activity.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The unique information determination means is
A game machine A5, characterized by comprising validity setting means (for example, expiration date information storage section 501c of authentication card 500) capable of setting validity of the correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the validity of the mode information stored in the correspondence information storage means can be set by the validity setting means provided in the unique information determination means. As a result, for example, by setting the validity of the correspondence information to a limited time, it is possible to enhance the management effect of whether or not the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, and to enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent acts. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines A3 to A5,
The processing means is
processing the control information output from the main control means into the processed information and outputting it to the sub-control means;
The sub control means is
outputting the processed information output by the processing means to the restoration means;
The restoration means is
A gaming machine A6, wherein the processing information output by the sub-control means is restored to the control information based on the correspondence information, and the restored control information is output to the sub-control means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machines A3 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the processing means processes the control information output from the main control means into processed information and outputs the processed information to the sub-control means. Further, the processing information output by the processing means is output to the restoring means by the sub control means. Then, the restoration means restores the processing information output by the sub-control means to the control information based on the correspondence information, and outputs the restored control information to the sub-control means. As a result, the control information output from the main control means reaches the sub-control means as normal control information via the processing means, the sub-control means and the restoration means. If any one of them is illegally exchanged due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent normal processing of the control information and normal execution of various controls in the game machine. As a result, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines A3 to A6,
The sub control means is
A first sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 111) that executes a predetermined game process;
A second sub-control means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) that executes a game process different from the first sub-control means,
The main control means is
Including output destination information indicating the sub control means of the output destination in the control information,
The processing means is
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that parts other than the output destination information are processed.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A3 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined game process is executed by the first sub-control means as sub-control means, and a game process different from that of the first sub-control means is executed by the second sub-control means as sub-control means. Here, output destination information indicating the output destination sub control means is included in the control information by the main control means, and portions other than the output destination information are processed by the processing means. As a result, when processing the control information, the parts other than the output destination information are processed, while the output destination information is not processed, so that the sub control means to be output according to the output destination information included in the processing information There is an effect that the processing information can be output accurately.

In any of gaming machines A3 to A7,
The main control means is
an abnormality detection means capable of detecting a predetermined abnormal state;
Abnormality information output means for outputting abnormality information indicating the abnormal state when the abnormality detection means detects the predetermined abnormal state,
The processing means is
A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the abnormality information output by the abnormality information output means is output to the sub control means without being processed.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machines A3 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, the abnormality detection means provided in the main control means can detect a predetermined abnormal state, and when the abnormality detection means detects the predetermined abnormal state, the abnormality information provided in the main control means is detected. The output means outputs abnormality information indicating the abnormal state. Here, the abnormal information output by the abnormal information output means is output to the sub-control means without being processed by the processing means. Thereby, when a predetermined abnormal state occurs, the abnormal state can be transmitted to the sub-control means without at least processing by the restoring means, and the sub-control means can quickly perform control regarding the abnormal state. It has the effect of being able to

<Group B: Granted points with limited use>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction is provided in the game area to change the flow direction of the game ball. Predetermined game values are given based on the entry of a game ball into any one of a plurality of ball entrances in which changing means are arranged, and a win-or-fail lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific ball entrance. , when winning in an advantageous state such as winning in the lottery, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in this regard, although it is necessary to improve the interest in the game.

The inventions of the B group have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and their object is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In a game machine for playing a game using a predetermined game medium (for example, a ball),
a game value imparting means (e.g., payout control device 111) that imparts a predetermined imparted game value (e.g., prize ball) as a result of a game using the game medium;
a game execution means (for example, shooting a ball paid out as a prize ball) that performs a game by using the given game value given by the game value giving means;
a usage regulation means (for example, restriction on use of model-limited imparted points on other models) for regulating the use of the given game value imparted by the game execution means when a predetermined condition is established. A gaming machine B0 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B0, a game is performed using a predetermined game medium, and the predetermined imparted game value is imparted by the game value imparting means as a result of the game using the game medium. Further, when a game is played by using the given game value imparted by the game value imparting means by the game execution means, and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the use restricting means controls the imparted game value imparted by the game execution means. Use of value is regulated. As a result, whether or not the granted game value can be used on the gaming machine depends on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the variety of games and improving the interest of the game. effective.

In gaming machine B0,
The use control means is
The game machine B1 is characterized by comprising: other machine regulating means for regulating use in a game machine other than the game machine to which the imparted game value is imparted.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the use of the game machine other than the game machine to which the imparted game value is imparted is restricted by the other machine restriction means provided in the use restriction means. As a result, it is possible to promote a game in the gaming machine to which the given game value has been given, and it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
The use control means is
The gaming machine B2 is characterized by comprising non-continuity restricting means for restricting the use of the gaming machine to which the imparted game value has been imparted, except when the game is continuously played.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discontinuation restriction means provided in the use restriction means restricts the use of the gaming machine except when the game is continuously played with the gaming machine to which the given game value is provided. As a result, it is possible to promote continued playing in the gaming machine to which the given game value has been provided, and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B2,
The use control means is
The game machine B3 is characterized by comprising post-day regulating means for regulating use other than when the game is played on the day when the given game value is given.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, use is restricted by the after-day restriction means provided in the use restriction means except when the game is played on the day when the given game value is awarded. As a result, it is possible to promote the game on the day when the given game value is given, and it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B3,
The use control means is
A game machine B4, characterized by comprising a different-type regulation means for regulating use in a game machine other than the same type of game machine as the game machine to which the imparted game value is imparted.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the use of the game machine other than the game machine of the same type as the game machine to which the given game value is provided is restricted by the other type restriction means provided in the use restriction means. As a result, it is possible to promote games on the gaming machine to which the given game value is provided and on the gaming machine of the same type, thereby improving the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B4,
Granted game value storage means (for example, holding grant points 603a4) for storing the granted game value granted by the game value granting means;
Purchased game value storage means (for example, held game points 603a3) for storing purchased game values (for example, game points) purchased by the player by a predetermined method (for example, cash input). Game machine B5 to play.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the imparted game value storage means stores the imparted game value imparted by the game value imparting means, and the purchased game value storage means stores the purchased game value purchased by the player according to a predetermined method. As a result, it is possible to separately manage the imparted gaming value acquired by the player through the game and the purchased gaming value purchased by the player, thereby diversifying the manner in which the gaming value owned by the player is used. , there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B5,
When the use of the given game value is not restricted by the use restricting means, the given game value is stored in the given game value storage means, and the purchased game value is stored in the purchased game value storage means. and priority use means for playing a game by preferentially using the given game value stored in the given game value storage means when the game machine B6 is set.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the use of the given game value is not restricted by the use restricting means, the given game value is stored in the given game value storage means and the purchased game value is stored in the purchased game value storage means. The given game value stored in the given game value storage means is preferentially used by the preferential use means to play the game. As a result, when both the granted gaming value and the purchased gaming value exist, it is possible to diversify the game mode by preferentially using the granted gaming value, which may be subject to usage restrictions, and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In gaming machine B5 or B6,
A gaming machine B7, wherein a prize related to the gaming machine to which the imparted game value is imparted can be exchanged with the imparted game value stored in the imparted game value storage means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, a prize related to the gaming machine to which the imparted game value has been imparted is configured to be exchangeable with the imparted game value stored in the imparted game value storage means. As a result, when the player wishes to exchange for a prize related to the gaming machine, it is possible to promote the game on the gaming machine related to the prize with the aim of acquiring the game value given by the gaming machine. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the operating rate of

In any of gaming machines B5 to B7,
A game machine B8, wherein a prize related to the game machine to which the given game value is given cannot be exchanged with the purchased game value stored in the purchased game value storage means.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machines B5 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the prize related to the gaming machine to which the given game value is given is configured to be non-exchangeable depending on the purchased game value stored in the purchased game value storage means. As a result, when a player wishes to exchange for a prize related to a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage the player to play a game on the gaming machine related to the prize with the aim of acquiring the gaming value provided by the gaming machine. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the operating rate of

<C Group: Encrypted Commands and Unencrypted Commands>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction is provided in the game area to change the flow direction of the game ball. Predetermined game values are given based on the entry of a game ball into any one of a plurality of ball entrances in which changing means are arranged, and a win-or-fail lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific ball entrance. , when winning in an advantageous state such as winning in the lottery, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-112444)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to enhance the effect of deterring cheating, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group C have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of deterring cheating.

In a game machine for playing a game using a predetermined game medium (for example, a ball),
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game;
Sub-control means (for example, payout control device 111 or sound lamp control device 113) capable of executing various controls based on control information (control command CC) output from the main control means;
Of the control information output from the main control means, predetermined first control information is processed into processing information based on a predetermined first predetermined condition (for example, serial number SN of main control device 110), and the secondary control information is processed. a processing output means (for example, an encryption device 300) that outputs to the control means;
unprocessed output means for outputting second control information different from the first control information to the sub control means without processing;
The processed information processed and output by the processed output means is restored to the first control information based on a second predetermined condition (for example, serial number SN of the authentication card 500) related to the first predetermined condition. a restoring means (for example, a decoding device 400),
The sub control means is
A gaming machine C0 characterized by not executing various controls equivalent to the first control information based on the processing information.

According to the gaming machine C0, a game is played using a predetermined game medium, the game is controlled by the main control means, and various controls are performed by the sub control means based on the control information output from the main control means. is configured to run. Here, the processing output means processes the predetermined first control information among the control information output from the main control means into processing information based on a predetermined first predetermined condition and outputs the processing information to the sub control means. The second control information different from the first control information is output to the sub control means without being processed by the processing means. Then, the restoring means restores the processed information processed and output by the processed output means to the first control information based on a second predetermined condition related to the first predetermined condition, and the sub-control means restores the processed information to the processed information. Based on this, various controls equivalent to the first control information are not executed. That is, when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related, since the control information that is processed information cannot be restored, the sub-control means executes various controls equivalent to the first control information. can't As a result, for example, the presence or absence of processing is divided according to the importance of the control information, various controls related to the second control information are quickly performed without increasing the control load, and the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related. In this case, it is possible to prevent the sub control means from normally executing various controls related to the processed first control information, thereby enhancing the safety of the first control information and enhancing the effect of deterring fraud. , has the effect of

In gaming machine C0,
The processing output means is
A gaming machine C1, wherein among the control information output from the main control means, game value-related information related to giving a game value is processed into the processed information and output.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the processing output means processes the game value-related information related to the awarding of the game value among the control means output from the main control means, and outputs the processed information. Thereby, the control information related to the game value is processed into the processed information, and when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related, various controls related to the game value related information processed by the sub control means are normally performed. This has the effect of increasing the safety of the game value-related information and enhancing the effect of deterring cheating.

In gaming machine C0 or C1,
The unprocessed output means is
A gaming machine C2 characterized by outputting non-game-value related information, which is not related to giving a game value, out of the control information output from the main control means without processing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unprocessed output means outputs, without processing, the non-game value related information that is not related to the giving of the game value among the control information output from the main control means. As a result, various controls related to non-game value related information that are not related to the granting of game values are quickly performed without increasing the control load, and when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related, the sub-control means , Various controls related to the processed first control information (game value-related information) can be prevented from being normally executed, the safety of the first control information can be enhanced, and fraudulent deterrence can be enhanced. has the effect of

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
Unique information storage means (eg, serial number storage unit 202j) for storing unique information (eg, serial number SN) as the first predetermined condition uniquely assigned to the main control means;
Corresponding information storage means (for example, authentication and an IC chip 501) of the card 500,
The processing output means is
processing the first control information output from the main control means into the processing information based on the unique information;
The restoration means is
A game machine C3, wherein the processing information is restored to the first control information based on the correspondence information.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unique information storage means stores the unique information as the first predetermined condition uniquely assigned to the main control means, and the corresponding information storage means stores the second condition corresponding to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means. Corresponding information as a predetermined condition is stored. Here, the first control information output from the main control means is processed by the processing output means into processed information based on the unique information, and the processed information is transformed into the first control information by the restoration means based on the corresponding information. Restored. Thus, when the correspondence relationship between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determining means is not normal, the first control information that is processed information can be restored. Therefore, the sub control means cannot execute various controls equivalent to the first control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means has been remodeled due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls in the game machine due to the different unique information, thereby enhancing the effect of deterring fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine C3,
Correspondence determination means (for example, separation and decoding processing (S3002)) for determining whether the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal,
The restoration means is
A game machine C4, wherein the processing information is restored to the first control information when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is determined by the correspondence relationship determination means. Then, when the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, the restoration means restores the processed information to the first control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means has been modified due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls based on the first control information in the game machine due to the different unique information. There is an effect that the deterrent effect of the action can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the restoring means
The game machine C5 is characterized in that the processed information is not restored to the first control information when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal, the restoration means does not restore the processed information to the first control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls based on the first control information in the game machine due to the difference in the unique information. There is an effect that the deterrent effect of the action can be enhanced.

In any of game machines C3 to C5,
The main control means is
outputting at least the first control information to the processing output means;
The processing output means is
processing the first control information output from the main control means into the processed information and outputting it to the sub control means;
The sub control means is
outputting the processing information output by the processing output means to the restoration means;
The restoration means is
A gaming machine C6, wherein the processed information output by the sub-control means is restored to the first control information based on the correspondence information, and the restored control information is output to the sub-control means. .

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means outputs at least the first control information to the processing output means, the processing output means processes the first control information output from the main control means into processing information, and outputs the processing information to the sub control means. output. Then, the sub control means outputs the processing information output by the processing output means to the restoring means, and the restoring means converts the processing information output by the sub control means to the first control information based on the correspondence information. and the restored first control information is output to the sub control means. As a result, the first control information output from the main control means reaches the sub-control means as normal first control information through the processing means, the sub-control means and the restoring means. Or, when any one of the restoring means is illegally exchanged due to fraudulent act, the first control information is not normally processed and various controls based on the first control information in the game machine are not normally executed. be able to. As a result, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In any of game machines C3 to C6,
The sub control means is
A first sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 111) that executes a predetermined game process;
A second sub-control means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) that executes a game process different from the first sub-control means,
The main control means is
Including output destination information indicating the sub control means of the output destination in the first control information,
The processing means is
A gaming machine C7 characterized by processing parts other than the output destination information.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C3 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined game process is executed by the first sub-control means as sub-control means, and a game process different from that of the first sub-control means is executed by the second sub-control means as sub-control means. Here, the output destination information indicating the output destination sub control means is included in the first control information by the main control means, and the part other than the output destination information is processed by the processing means. As a result, when processing the first control information, portions other than the output destination information are processed while the output destination information is not processed. There is an effect that the processing information can be accurately output to the control means.

In any of gaming machines C3 to C7,
The main control means is
an abnormality detection means capable of detecting a predetermined abnormal state;
Abnormal information output means for outputting abnormal information indicating the abnormal state when the abnormal state is detected by the abnormal state detection means,
The processing means is
A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the abnormality information output by the abnormality information output means is output to the sub control means without being processed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machines C3 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the abnormality detection means provided in the main control means can detect a predetermined abnormal state, and when the abnormality detection means detects the predetermined abnormal state, the abnormality information provided in the main control means is detected. Abnormal information indicating the abnormal state is output by the output means. Here, the abnormality information output by the abnormality information output means is output to the sub-control means without being processed by the processing means. Thus, when a predetermined abnormal condition occurs, the abnormal condition can be transmitted to the sub-control means without at least processing by the restoring means, and the sub-control means can quickly perform control regarding the abnormal condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Group D: Encrypted control device and non-encrypted control device>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction is provided in the game area to change the flow direction of the game ball. Predetermined game values are given based on the entry of a game ball into any one of a plurality of ball entrances in which changing means are arranged, and a win-or-fail lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific ball entrance. , when winning in an advantageous state such as winning in the lottery, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-112444)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to enhance the effect of deterring cheating, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group D have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of deterring cheating.

In a game machine for playing a game using a predetermined game medium (for example, a ball),
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game;
At least two or more sub-control means (for example, payout control device 111 or sound lamp control device 113) capable of executing various controls (control command CC) based on control information output from the main control means;
Among the control information output from the main control means, the first control information for at least one of the sub-control means is processed information based on a predetermined first predetermined condition (for example, serial number SN of main control device 110) a processing output means (for example, an encryption device 300) that processes and outputs the
unprocessed output means for outputting the second control information to the other sub-control means without processing;
The processed information processed and output by the processed output means is restored to the first control information based on a second predetermined condition (for example, serial number SN of the authentication card 500) related to the first predetermined condition. a restoring means (for example, a decoding device 400),
The sub control means is
A gaming machine D0 characterized in that various controls equivalent to the first control information are not executed based on the processing information.

According to the gaming machine D0, a game is played using a predetermined game medium, the main control means controls the game, and at least two or more sub-control means control information output from the main control means. Based on this, various controls are configured to be executable. wherein the processing output means processes the first control information for at least one sub-control means out of the control information output from the main control means into processed information based on a predetermined first predetermined condition and outputs the processed information; The non-processing means outputs the second control information to the other sub-control means without processing. Then, the restoring means restores the processed information processed and output by the processed output means to the first control information based on a second predetermined condition related to the first predetermined condition, and the sub-control means restores the processed information to the processed information. Based on this, various controls equivalent to the first control information are not executed. That is, when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related, the first control information output to the one sub-control means and made into the processing information cannot be restored. cannot execute various controls equivalent to the first control information. As a result, for example, the presence or absence of processing is divided according to the degree of importance of the sub-control means, and various controls related to the second control information for the other sub-control means are quickly performed without increasing the control load, while the first predetermined condition and the first In the case where the 2 predetermined conditions are not related, the 1 sub-control means can be prevented from normally executing various controls related to the first control information for the sub-control means, thereby enhancing the safety of the first control information. , the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In gaming machine D0,
The sub control means is
a payout control means (e.g., payout control device 111) that executes control (e.g., ball payout) related to giving game value based on the first control information output from the main control means;
The processing output means is
A game machine D1, wherein the first control information for the payout control means is processed into the processed information and output.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the payout control means as the sub-control means executes the control related to the awarding of the game value based on the first control information output from the main control means. Then, the processing output means processes the first control information for the payout control means into processing information and outputs the processed information. Thereby, the first control information for the payout control means for executing the control related to the game value is processed into the processed information, and the payout control means processes the first control information when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related. Various controls related to the first control information can be prevented from being normally executed, the safety of the first control information related to the granting of game values can be enhanced, and the effect of deterring cheating can be enhanced. There is

In gaming machine D0 or D1,
The sub control means is
Based on the second control information output from the main control means, sub-control means (e.g., sound ramp control device 113) that executes control not directly related to the giving of game value (e.g., execution of variable effect), with
The unprocessed output means is
A game machine D2 characterized by outputting said second control information to said sub-control means without processing.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sub-control means as the sub-control means executes control not directly related to the giving of game value based on the second control information output from the main control means. Then, the unprocessed output means outputs the second control information to the sub-control means without processing. As a result, various controls relating to the second control information to the sub-control means that are not directly related to the provision of game value are quickly performed without increasing the control load, and when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are not related, Effect of preventing normal execution of various controls related to the processed first control information in the sub control means, enhancing the safety of the first control information, and enhancing the effect of deterring fraud. There is

In any one of the game machines D0 to D2,
Unique information storage means (eg, serial number storage unit 202j) for storing unique information (eg, serial number SN) as the first predetermined condition uniquely assigned to the main control means;
Corresponding information storage means (for example, authentication and an IC chip 501) of the card 500,
The processing output means is
processing the first control information output from the main control means into the processing information based on the unique information;
The restoration means is
A gaming machine D3, wherein the processing information is restored to the first control information based on the correspondence information.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unique information storage means stores the unique information as the first predetermined condition uniquely assigned to the main control means, and the corresponding information storage means stores the second condition corresponding to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means. Corresponding information as a predetermined condition is stored. Here, the first control information output from the main control means is processed by the processing output means into processed information based on the unique information, and the processed information is transformed into the first control information by the restoration means based on the correspondence information. Restored. Thus, when the correspondence relationship between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determining means is not normal, the first control information that is processed information can be restored. Therefore, the sub control means cannot execute various controls equivalent to the first control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls in the game machine due to the different unique information, thereby enhancing the effect of deterring fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D3,
Correspondence determination means (for example, separation and decoding processing (S3002)) for determining whether the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal,
The restoration means is
A game machine D4, wherein the processing information is restored to the first control information when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is determined by the correspondence relationship determination means. Then, when the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, the restoration means restores the processed information to the first control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means has been modified due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls based on the first control information in the game machine due to the different unique information. There is an effect that the deterrent effect of the action can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the restoring means
The game machine D5 is characterized in that the processed information is not restored to the first control information when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal, the restoration means does not restore the processed information to the first control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls based on the first control information in the game machine due to the difference in the unique information. There is an effect that the deterrent effect of the action can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines D3 to D5,
The main control means is
outputting at least the first control information to the processing output means;
The processing output means is
processing the first control information output from the main control means into the processed information and outputting it to the sub control means;
The sub control means is
outputting the processing information output by the processing output means to the restoration means;
The restoration means is
A gaming machine D6, wherein the processed information output by the sub-control means is restored to the first control information based on the correspondence information, and the restored control information is output to the sub-control means. .

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machines D3 to D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means outputs at least the first control information to the processing output means, the processing output means processes the first control information output from the main control means into processing information, and outputs the processing information to the sub control means. output. Then, the sub control means outputs the processing information output by the processing output means to the restoring means, and the restoring means converts the processing information output by the sub control means to the first control information based on the correspondence information. and the restored first control information is output to the sub control means. As a result, the first control information output from the main control means reaches the sub-control means as normal first control information through the processing means, the sub-control means and the restoring means. Or, when any one of the restoring means is illegally exchanged due to fraudulent act, the first control information is not normally processed and various controls based on the first control information in the game machine are not normally executed. be able to. As a result, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines D3 to D6,
The main control means is
Including output destination information indicating the sub control means of the output destination in the first control information,
The processing means is
A gaming machine D7 characterized by processing parts other than the output destination information.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machines D3 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means includes the output destination information indicating the output destination sub control means in the first control information, and the processing means processes the portion other than the output destination information. As a result, when processing the first control information, portions other than the output destination information are processed while the output destination information is not processed. There is an effect that the processing information can be accurately output to the control means.

In any of gaming machines D3 to D7,
The main control means is
an abnormality detection means capable of detecting a predetermined abnormal state;
Abnormality information output means for outputting abnormality information indicating the abnormal state when the abnormality detection means detects the predetermined abnormal state,
The processing means is
A game machine D8 characterized in that the abnormality information output by the abnormality information output means is output to the sub control means without being processed.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machines D3 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the abnormality detection means provided in the main control means can detect a predetermined abnormal state, and when the abnormality detection means detects the predetermined abnormal state, the abnormality information provided in the main control means is detected. Abnormal information indicating the abnormal state is output by the output means. Here, the abnormality information output by the abnormality information output means is output to the sub-control means without being processed by the processing means. Thus, when a predetermined abnormal condition occurs, the abnormal condition can be transmitted to the sub-control means without at least processing by the restoring means, and the sub-control means can quickly perform control regarding the abnormal condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Group E: Prevention of removal of authentication card>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction is provided in the game area to change the flow direction of the game ball. Predetermined game values are given based on the entry of a game ball into any one of a plurality of ball entrances in which changing means are arranged, and a win-or-fail lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific ball entrance. , when winning in an advantageous state such as winning in the lottery, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-112444)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to enhance the effect of deterring cheating, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group E have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of deterring cheating.

In a game machine for playing a game using a predetermined game medium (for example, a ball),
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game;
Unique information storage means (eg, serial number storage unit 202j) for storing unique information (eg, serial number SN) uniquely assigned to the main control means;
Sub-control means (for example, payout control device 111 or sound lamp control device 113) capable of executing various controls based on control information (control command CC) output from the main control means;
Unique information determining means (for example, decryption device 400 and authentication card 500) for determining the unique information stored in the unique information storage means;
Distinguishable means (for example, card insertion hole 410) that makes the unique information distinguishing means in a distinguishable state;
regulation means (for example, not decrypting an encrypted control command CC) for regulating execution of various controls based on the control information when the unique information determination means determines that the unique information is not normal;
Unidentifiable state difficulty means (for example, card insertion hole 410 inserted into card insertion hole 410) that makes it difficult or impossible to make the unique information determination means that is in the determination possible state by the determination possible means difficult or impossible to be in a determination impossible state A game machine E0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E0, a game is played using a predetermined game medium, the game is controlled by the main control means, and unique information uniquely assigned to the main control means is stored in the unique information storage means. remembered. Also, the sub-control means can execute various controls based on the control information output from the main control means. Here, the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is discriminated by the unique information discriminating means, and the unique information discriminating means is brought into a discriminable state by the discriminating means. Further, when the unique information determining means determines that the unique information is not normal, the restricting means restricts execution of various controls based on the control information. Then, the unidentifiable information difficult means makes it difficult or impossible for the unique information determining means, which has been set in the unidentifiable state by the unidentifiable means, to enter the unidentifiable state. As a result, for example, when the main control means has been modified due to fraudulent activity, various controls in the game machine can be restricted due to the difference in the unique information, while the unique information discrimination means cannot discriminate. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring and to suppress fraudulent acts on the unique information determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In addition, "regulating the execution of various controls" means, for example, when not performing various controls by not receiving control information normally, when not performing various controls by discarding control information, or when not performing a game A case where various controls are not executed by stopping or canceling is exemplified.

In gaming machine E0,
The indistinguishable state difficulty means is
Separation-difficult means (for example, extraction lock function of authentication card 500) that makes it difficult or impossible to separate the unique information discrimination means in the discrimination possible state from the discrimination means. A gaming machine E1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unique information determining means, which has been placed in the distinguishable state in the distinguishable means, is rendered difficult or unseparable from the distinguishable means by means of the separate difficult means provided in the distinguishable state difficult means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unique information discrimination means from being in a discriminable state, and to suppress fraudulent acts on the unique information discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In gaming machine E0 or E1,
The indistinguishable state difficulty means is
Damage trace means (for example, authentication When the card 500 is forcibly pulled out from the card insertion hole 410, the card insertion hole 410 or part of the decoding device 400 is destroyed.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, when an attempt is made to make the unique information discriminating means, which is in a discriminable state in the discriminating means, an unidentifiable state, a part of the game machine is damaged by the damage trace means provided in the unidentifiable state difficult means. Traces remain. As a result, if the unique information discriminating means is forced to be in a discriminable state, a part of the game machine is damaged and the trace remains. It is possible to recognize whether or not the disabled state has been set. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring the unique information determination means from being put in the unidentifiable state, and to enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent acts.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E2,
The unique information determination means is
Corresponding information storage means (for example, IC chip 501 of authentication card 500) for storing correspondence information (for example, serial number storage section 501a and master key storage section 501b) corresponding to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means and,
Correspondence determination means (for example, separation and decoding processing (S3002)) for determining whether the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal,
The sub control means is
A game machine E3 characterized in that, when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, various controls based on the control information are executed.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the correspondence information corresponding to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is stored by the correspondence information storage means provided in the unique information determination means, and the correspondence relationship determination means also provided in the unique information determination means, It is determined whether or not the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal. When the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, the sub-control means executes various controls based on the control information. As a result, when the correspondence relationship between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determination means is normal, the restriction means does not restrict the execution of the control information and various control can be exercised. Therefore, if the main control means and the unique information discrimination means are legitimate, the game can be played normally. There is an effect that various controls in the machine can be regulated, and the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In gaming machine E3,
The sub control means is
The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, when the correspondence relationship determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal, the regulation means prevents execution of various controls based on the control information.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the correspondence determination means determines that the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is not normal, the restriction means does not perform various controls based on the control information in the sub-control means. Accordingly, when the correspondence relationship between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determining means is not normal, the restricting means restricts the execution of the control information, thereby executing various controls. I can't. Therefore, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, various controls in the gaming machine can be regulated due to different unique information, and the effect of deterring fraudulent activity can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine E3 or E4,
processing means (for example, encryption device 300) for processing the control information output from the main control means into processed information based on the unique information;
a restoration means (for example, S3106 to S3110 of the separation and decoding process (S3002)) for restoring the processed information processed by the processing means to the control information based on the correspondence information;
The sub control means is
A gaming machine E5 characterized in that various controls equivalent to the control information are not executed based on the processing information.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3 or E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the control information output from the main control means is processed by the processing means into processed information based on the unique information, and the processed information processed by the processing means is processed into control information by the restoration means based on the correspondence information. Restored. Then, the sub control means is configured not to execute various controls equivalent to the control information based on the processing information. That is, if the correspondence between the unique information stored in the main control means and the corresponding information stored in the unique information determination means is not normal, the control information that is processed information cannot be restored. The means cannot execute various controls equivalent to the control information. As a result, for example, when the main control means is modified due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the normal execution of various controls in the game machine due to the different unique information, thereby enhancing the effect of deterring fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines E0 to E5,
A game machine E6, wherein the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is configured to be unrewritable.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is configured to be unrewritable. As a result, it is possible to prevent violation of the regulation by the regulation means due to rewriting of the unique information due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent activity.

In any of gaming machines E3 to E6,
The unique information determination means is
A gaming machine E7 characterized by comprising validity setting means (for example, expiration date information storage section 501c of authentication card 500) capable of setting validity of the correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E3 to E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the validity of the mode information stored in the correspondence information storage means can be set by the validity setting means provided in the unique information determination means. As a result, for example, by setting the validity of the correspondence information to a limited time, it is possible to enhance the management effect of whether or not the correspondence relationship between the unique information and the correspondence information is normal, and to enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent acts. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines E5 to E7,
The processing means is
processing the control information output from the main control means into the processed information and outputting it to the sub-control means;
The sub control means is
outputting the processed information output by the processing means to the restoration means;
The restoration means is
A gaming machine E8, wherein the processing information output by the sub-control means is restored to the control information based on the correspondence information, and the restored control information is output to the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the processing means processes the control information output from the main control means into processed information and outputs the processed information to the sub-control means. Further, the processing information output by the processing means is output to the restoring means by the sub control means. Then, the restoration means restores the processing information output by the sub-control means to the control information based on the correspondence information, and outputs the restored control information to the sub-control means. As a result, the control information output from the main control means reaches the sub-control means as normal control information via the processing means, the sub-control means and the restoration means. If any one of them is illegally exchanged due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent normal processing of the control information and normal execution of various controls in the game machine. As a result, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

<Group F: Hall controller x game machine>
Conventionally, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that is installed in a game hall (for example, a game hall) and performs a game by using a game medium (for example, a ball), and a game machine that a player plays There is a gaming system including a management device (for example, a hall computer) that individually accumulates and manages game results (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-138711)).

However, in the gaming system described above, it is necessary to enhance the effect of deterring cheating, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group F have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game system capable of enhancing the effect of deterring cheating.

A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 10) installed in a game hall and capable of executing a game by using a predetermined game medium (or game medium information; for example, information on the number of balls or medals);
member information storage means (e.g., member ID information 603a1) for storing member information for individually identifying players by being registered in advance; (or game value purchased by a player in a predetermined manner), etc., in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means (for example, retained gaming points). 603a3 and/or retained awarded points 603a4, or executed game points 603b2 and/or executed awarded points 603b3),
The management device
When the game value information is stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means, a game that can be played in the gaming machine based on the game value information. A game system F0 characterized by comprising permission means (for example, a ball can be shot based on the executed game points 603b2 and/or the executed awarded points 603b3).

According to the game system F0, a game machine installed in a game arcade can execute a game by using a predetermined game medium. In addition, in the management device, the member information storage means stores member information for individually identifying the players by being registered in advance, and the individual game value storage means stores the member information based on the game played on the gaming machine. Game value information such as the given game value is stored in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means. Here, when the game value information is stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means by the game permission means provided in the management device, based on the game value information can be played in the gaming machine. As a result, the management device centrally manages the game value information possessed by the player, and based on the game value information, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be played in the game machine. There is an effect that it can be increased.

In the game system F0,
The game permission means is
execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information (e.g., game execution instruction) for causing the gaming machine to execute a game when the game value information is stored in the individual game value storage means; ,
The game machine is
game execution means (e.g., ball shooting) for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means;
execution result output means (e.g., output of execution result information) for outputting execution result information indicating that the game has been executed by the game execution means to the management device;
The management device
game value information decreasing means for decreasing (for example, subtracting 1) the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means; A gaming system F1 characterized by:

According to the game system F1, in addition to the effects of the game system F0, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the game value information is stored in the individual game value storage means, the execution information output means provided in the game permission means can output the game execution information for causing the gaming machine to execute the game. ing. Then, in the gaming machine, when the game execution means outputs the game execution information from the execution information output means, the game is executed using the game medium, and the execution result output means causes the game execution means to execute the game. Execution result information indicating that it has been executed is output to the management device. Here, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is updated when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means by the game value information reduction means provided in the management device. As a result, while allowing the game to be played in the gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the management device, the gaming value information is reduced when the game is executed in the gaming machine, thereby allowing the game owned by the player to be played in the management device. Since the value information can be centrally managed, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In the game system F1,
The game machine is
Provided game value information (e.g., game value data) indicating the provided game value when a predetermined provided game value is provided as a result of executing a game using the game medium based on the game execution information. , a given game value output means for outputting to the management device,
The management device
and game value increasing means for increasing the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the given game value information is output from the given game value output means. Game system F2.

According to the game system F2, in addition to the effects of the game system F1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a given game value is given as a result of executing a game using a game medium based on the game execution information by the given game value output means provided in the gaming machine, the given game value is output. The provided game value information shown is output to the management device. When the given game value information is output from the given game value output means by the game value increasing means provided in the management device, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is increased. As a result, while allowing the game to be played in the gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the management device, the game value information is increased when the given game value is given as a result of the execution of the game in the gaming machine. Since the game value information possessed by the player can be centrally managed in the management device, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring cheating.

In the game system F2,
The individual game value storage means is
an imparted game value storage means (for example, holding imparted points 603a4) for storing the game value information increased by the game value increasing means as an imparted game value;
Purchased game value storage means (for example, held game points 603a3) for storing the game value information purchased by the player by a predetermined method (for example, cash input) as purchased game values (for example, game points). A gaming system F3 characterized by:

According to the game system F3, in addition to the effects of the game system F2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game value information increased by the game value increasing means is stored as the given game value by the given game value storage means provided in the individual game value storage means, and the purchased game value provided in the individual game value storage means is stored. The storage means stores the game value information purchased by the player according to a predetermined method as the purchased game value. As a result, it is possible to separately manage the imparted gaming value acquired by the player through the game and the purchased gaming value purchased by the player, thereby diversifying the manner in which the gaming value owned by the player is used. , there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game system F3,
The given game value stored in the given game value storage means when the given game value is stored in the given game value storage means and the purchased game value is stored in the purchased game value storage means. A game system F4 characterized by comprising a preferential use means for preferentially using the .

According to the game system F4, in addition to the effects of the game system F3, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the given game value is stored in the given game value storage means and the purchased game value is stored in the purchased game value storage means, the given game value is stored in the given game value storage means by the preferential use means. Value is used first. As a result, when both the granted gaming value and the purchased gaming value exist, it is possible to diversify the game mode by preferentially using the granted gaming value, which may be subject to usage restrictions, and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In gaming system F3 or F4,
The management device
a game history storage means (for example, game history information 603a2) for storing game history information of a gaming machine or the like played by a player registered in the member information stored in the member information storage means;
Based on the game history information stored in the game history storage means, use regulation means for regulating the use of the given game value information stored in the given game value storage means A game system F5 characterized by comprising:

According to the game system F5, in addition to the effects of the game system F3 or F4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game history storage means provided in the management device stores the game history information of the gaming machine or the like played by the player registered in the member information stored in the member information storage means, and the use restriction means stores the game history information. , use of the given game value information stored in the given game value storage means is regulated based on the game history information stored in the game history storage means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the usage pattern of the game value possessed by the player by differentiating the mode of use of the given game value information and the purchased game value information possessed by the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

<Group G: Net x hall computer x game machine>
Conventionally, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that is installed in a game hall (for example, a game hall) and performs a game by using a game medium (for example, a ball), and a game machine that a player plays There is a gaming system including a management device (for example, a hall computer) that individually accumulates and manages game results (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-138711)).

However, in the gaming system described above, it is necessary to improve convenience for players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group G was made in view of the above-described circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming system capable of enhancing convenience for players.

A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 10) installed in a game hall and capable of executing a game by using a predetermined game medium (or game medium information; for example, information on the number of balls or medals);
member information storage means (e.g., member ID information 603a1) for storing member information for individually identifying players by being registered in advance; (or game value purchased by a player in a predetermined manner), etc., in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means (for example, retained gaming points). 603a3 and/or retained awarded points 603a4, or executed game points 603b2 and/or executed awarded points 603b3);
a photographing means (for example, a video camera 701) for photographing an image of the gaming machine;
A gaming system comprising terminal means (eg, terminal device PC) configured to communicate with the management device from outside the gaming hall via a predetermined transmission path (eg, Internet line),
The management device
video output means capable of outputting a game machine video of the gaming machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
a display means (for example, a monitor 900) capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means;
external execution information output means (for example, "fire button image") for outputting external execution information for executing a game in the gaming machine to the management device;
The management device
When the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means , execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information (for example, game execution instruction) for causing the gaming machine to execute a game,
The game machine is
game execution means (e.g., ball shooting) for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means;
execution result output means (e.g., output of execution result information) for outputting execution result information indicating that the game has been executed by the game execution means to the management device;
The management device
game value information decreasing means for decreasing (for example, subtracting 1) the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means; A gaming system G0 characterized by:

According to the game system G0, a game machine installed in a game arcade can execute a game by using a predetermined game medium. In addition, in the management device, the member information storage means stores member information for individually identifying the players by being registered in advance, and the individual game value storage means stores the member information based on the game played on the gaming machine. Game value information such as the given game value is stored in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means. Further, the image of the game machine is captured by the image capturing means, and the terminal means is configured to be capable of communicating with the management device from outside the game arcade through a predetermined transmission path. Here, the image output means provided in the management device is configured to be capable of outputting the game machine image of the game machine photographed by the photographing means to the terminal means. In addition, the display means provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image output by the video output means, and the external execution information output means also provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image to the management apparatus. External execution information for executing a game is output. Then, when the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, the execution information output means provided in the management device stores it in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means. Based on the game value information received, game execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game can be output. Here, when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means, the game is executed using the game medium by the game execution means provided in the gaming machine, and the execution result output means outputs the game execution means. Execution result information indicating that the game has been executed is output to the management device. Then, when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is reduced by the game value information reduction means provided in the management device. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine by means of the terminal means.

In the game system G0,
The game machine is
a means for using the game medium within a predetermined range of intensity (e.g., shooting a ball at multiple stages of shooting intensity);
The external execution information output means is
within-range output means for specifying any intensity within the range used by the within-range use means and outputting the external execution information to the gaming machine via the management device;
The game execution means is
The game system G1 is characterized by comprising intensity-dependent use means for using the game medium according to the intensity specified by the external execution information.

According to the game system G1, in addition to the effects of the game system G0, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is configured to be usable within a predetermined range of intensity by means of within-range usage means provided in the gaming machine. In addition, by the within-range output means provided in the external execution information output means, any strength within the range used by the within-range use means is specified, and the external execution information is sent to the gaming machine via the management device. output for Then, the game medium is used according to the strength designated by the external execution information by the strength corresponding usage means provided in the game execution means. As a result, it is possible to designate the intensity of use of game media according to the intention of the player from a terminal device outside the game hall, diversify the place where the game is played and the game mode, and improve the convenience of the player. There is an effect that it can be increased.

In the game system G1,
The game machine is
A game area in which a plurality of game devices (e.g., first start port 64a, variable winning device 65, etc.) are arranged and game media can flow down,
The game execution means is
A game system G2 characterized by using the game medium so as to reach at least the game area when the external execution information with the weakest intensity is output.

According to the game system G2, in addition to the effects of the game system G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game machine is provided with a game area in which a plurality of game devices are arranged and game media can flow down. Then, when the external execution information with the weakest intensity is output, the game execution means uses the game medium so that it reaches at least the game area. As a result, when a game is played on the gaming machine by the terminal device from outside the gaming hall, the gaming medium always reaches the gaming area regardless of which intensity is specified, so processing when a so-called foul ball is generated becomes unnecessary. , the control load of the game machine and the management device can be reduced.

In the game system G2,
The within-range output means is
A game system G3 characterized in that the game medium can flow down to all the game devices provided in the game area.

According to the game system G3, in addition to the effects of the game system G2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the within-range output means allows the game medium to flow down to all the game devices provided in the game area. As a result, game media can reach all game machines, and a game equivalent to a game in a game hall can be executed even from terminal means outside the game machine. As a result, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced by diversifying the place where the game is played.

In gaming system G2 or G3,
The within-range output means is
The game system G4 is characterized in that the external execution information can be output at a level of strength equal to or greater than the number of the game machines provided in the game area.

According to the game system G4, in addition to the effects of the game system G2 or G3, the following effects are obtained. In other words, the in-range output means can output the external execution information at a level of strength equal to or greater than the number of game machines provided in the game area. As a result, it is possible to use the game medium toward the game area with a level of intensity greater than the number of game machines, and by diversifying the game execution mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In any of the game systems G0 to G4,
The game machine is
Provided game value information (e.g., game value data) indicating the provided game value when a predetermined provided game value is provided as a result of executing a game using the game medium based on the game execution information. , a given game value output means for outputting to the management device,
The management device
and game value increasing means for increasing the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the given game value information is output from the given game value output means. Game system G5.

According to the game system G5, in addition to the effects of the game systems G0 to G4, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a given game value is given as a result of executing a game using a game medium based on the game execution information by the given game value output means provided in the gaming machine, the given game value is output. The provided game value information shown is output to the management device. When the given game value information is output from the given game value output means by the game value increasing means provided in the management device, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is increased. As a result, while allowing the game to be played in the gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the management device, the game value information is increased when the given game value is given as a result of the execution of the game in the gaming machine. Since the game value information possessed by the player can be centrally managed in the management device, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring cheating.

In any of the game systems G0 to G5,
The management device
game value information output means for outputting the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
A game system G6, wherein when the game value information is output by the game value information output means, the game value information is displayed on the display means.

According to the game system G6, in addition to the effects of the game systems G0 to G5, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is output to the terminal means by the game value information output means provided in the management device. Then, in the terminal means, when the game value information is output by the game value output means, the game value information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine while confirming the gaming value information owned by the player himself/herself on the terminal means, and by diversifying the place where the game is executed, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the convenience of

<Group H: Prohibition of access from the other side for gaming machines accessed via the hall or the net>
Conventionally, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that is installed in a game hall (for example, a game hall) and performs a game by using a game medium (for example, a ball), and a game machine that a player plays There is a gaming system including a management device (for example, a hall computer) that individually accumulates and manages game results (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-138711)).

However, in the gaming system described above, it is necessary to improve convenience for players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group H have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game system capable of enhancing convenience for players.

a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko machine 10) installed in a gaming arcade and capable of executing a game by a player using a predetermined game medium (or game medium information; e.g., information on the number of balls or medals);
member information storage means (e.g., member ID information 603a1) for storing member information for individually identifying players by being registered in advance; (or game value purchased by a player in a predetermined manner), etc., in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means (for example, retained gaming points). 603a3 and/or retained awarded points 603a4, or executed game points 603b2 and/or executed awarded points 603b3);
a photographing means (for example, a video camera 701) for photographing an image of the game machine;
A gaming system comprising terminal means (eg, terminal device PC) configured to communicate with the management device from outside the gaming hall via a predetermined transmission path (eg, Internet line),
The management device
video output means capable of outputting a game machine video of the gaming machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
a display means (for example, a monitor 900) capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means;
external execution information output means (for example, "fire button image") for outputting external execution information for executing a game in the gaming machine to the management device;
The management device
When the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means , execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information (for example, game execution instruction) for causing the gaming machine to execute a game,
The game machine is
game execution means (e.g., ball shooting) for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means;
A gaming system comprising terminal-side execution regulation means for regulating execution of a game by said terminal means for said gaming machine when a player is executing a game on said gaming machine in said gaming parlor. H0.

According to the game system H0, a game machine installed in a game arcade is configured so that a game can be executed by a player using a predetermined game medium. In addition, in the management device, the member information storage means stores member information for individually identifying the players by being registered in advance, and the individual game value storage means stores the member information based on the game played on the gaming machine. Game value information such as the given game value is stored in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means. Further, the image of the game machine is captured by the image capturing means, and the terminal means is configured to be capable of communicating with the management device from outside the game arcade through a predetermined transmission path. Here, the image output means provided in the management device is configured to be capable of outputting the game machine image of the game machine photographed by the photographing means to the terminal means. In addition, the display means provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image output by the video output means, and the external execution information output means also provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image to the management apparatus. External execution information for executing a game is output. Then, when the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, the execution information output means provided in the management device stores it in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means. Based on the game value information received, game execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game can be output. Here, when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means, the game is executed using the game medium by the game execution means provided in the gaming machine. When a player is playing a game on the gaming machine in the gaming arcade, the terminal-side execution regulation means regulates the execution of the game by the terminal means for the gaming machine. As a result, in a gaming machine capable of playing games in a game hall and a terminal means, when a player is playing a game in the game hall, execution of the game by the terminal means can be restricted. The convenience of the player can be improved by diversifying the place where the game is performed while preventing the situation where the game is played in both the game hall and the terminal means in one game machine. There is

In the game system H0,
The terminal-side execution regulation means,
When a player is playing a game on the gaming machine in the gaming parlor, a terminal-side game execution impossibility display (e.g., "playing display") indicating that the gaming machine cannot play a game is displayed on the display means. A game system H1 characterized by displaying.

According to the game system H1, in addition to the effects of the game system H0, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a player is playing a game on a gaming machine in a game arcade, the terminal-side execution restricting means displays on the display means a terminal-side game execution impossibility display indicating that the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. . As a result, when a player is playing a game in a game hall, the display means of the terminal means can recognize that the game cannot be executed in the game machine. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved by diversifying the place where the game is played while preventing the situation where the game is played together.

In the game system H0 or H1,
a game hall side execution regulation means for regulating the execution of a game in the game machine in the game machine when a game is being executed in the game machine by the player at the terminal means. System H2.

According to the game system H2, in addition to the effects of the game system H0 or H1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a game is being played in a game machine by a player on the terminal means, execution of a game in the game machine is restricted by the game parlor side execution regulation means. As a result, when a player is playing a game using the terminal means in a game machine capable of playing a game in the game hall and the terminal means, execution of the game on the game machine in the game hall is restricted. It is possible to improve the convenience of the players by diversifying the place where the game is performed while preventing the situation where the game is played in both the game hall and the terminal means in one gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to

In the game system H2,
The amusement center side execution regulation means,
A gaming system characterized in that, when a game is being played in the gaming machine by a player on the terminal means, a gaming machine side execution impossibility display indicating that the gaming machine cannot play the game is displayed on the gaming machine. H3.

According to the game system H3, in addition to the effects of the game system H2, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a game is being played in the gaming machine by the player on the terminal means, the gaming machine side execution prohibition display indicating that the gaming machine cannot be played is displayed on the gaming machine by the gaming hall side execution regulation means. be done. As a result, when a player is playing a game on the terminal means, the game machine can recognize that the game cannot be executed on the game machine, and the player can play the game on the game hall and the terminal means on one gaming machine. By diversifying the place where the game is played while preventing the situation where the game is played, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

In gaming system H2 or H3,
The amusement center side execution regulation means,
A use prohibiting means (for example, prohibiting the shooting of balls) for prohibiting the use of game media in the gaming machine when a game is being played in the gaming machine by a player at the terminal means. Characterized game system H4.

According to the game system H4, in addition to the effects of the game system H2 or H3, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a game is being played in a game machine by a player on the terminal means, use of the game medium is prohibited in the game machine by the use prohibition means provided in the game parlor side execution regulation means. As a result, when a player is playing a game using the terminal means, it is possible to configure the game machine so that the game medium cannot be used to play the game, and the game hall and the terminal means can be arranged in one game machine. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved by diversifying the place where the game is played while preventing the situation where the game is played together with the other.

In any of the game systems H0 to H4,
The game machine is
execution result output means (e.g., output of execution result information) for outputting execution result information indicating that the game has been executed by the game execution means to the management device;
The management device
game value information decreasing means for decreasing (for example, subtracting 1) the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means; A game system H5 characterized by:

According to the game system H5, in addition to the effects of the game systems H0 to H4, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the execution information output means outputs the game execution information, the game execution means provided in the gaming machine executes a game using the game medium, and the execution result output means causes the game execution means to execute the game. is output to the management device. Then, when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is reduced by the game value information reduction means provided in the management device. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine by means of the terminal means.

In any of the game systems H0 to H5,
The game machine is
Provided game value information (e.g., game value data) indicating the provided game value when a predetermined provided game value is provided as a result of executing a game using the game medium based on the game execution information. , a given game value output means for outputting to the management device,
The management device
and game value increasing means for increasing the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the given game value information is output from the given game value output means. Game system H6.

According to the game system H6, in addition to the effects of the game systems H0 to H5, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a given game value is given as a result of executing a game using a game medium based on the game execution information by the given game value output means provided in the gaming machine, the given game value is output. The provided game value information shown is output to the management device. When the given game value information is output from the given game value output means by the game value increasing means provided in the management device, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is increased. As a result, while allowing the game to be played in the gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the management device, the game value information is increased when the given game value is given as a result of the execution of the game in the gaming machine. Since the game value information possessed by the player can be centrally managed in the management device, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring cheating.

In any of the game systems H0 to H6,
The management device
game value information output means for outputting the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
A game system H7 characterized by displaying the game value information on the display means when the game value information is output by the game value information output means.

According to the game system H7, in addition to the effects of the game systems H0 to H6, the following effects are produced. That is, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is output to the terminal means by the game value information output means provided in the management device. Then, in the terminal means, when the game value information is output by the game value output means, the game value information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine while confirming the gaming value information owned by the player himself/herself on the terminal means, and by diversifying the place where the game is executed, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the convenience of

<Group I: When one member is playing a game on the net or in a hall, the other member is prevented from playing multiple games>
Conventionally, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that is installed in a game hall (for example, a game hall) and performs a game by using a game medium (for example, a ball), and a game machine that a player plays There is a game system including a management device (for example, a hall computer) that individually accumulates and manages game results (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-138711)).

However, in the gaming system described above, it is necessary to suppress cheating by players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game system capable of suppressing fraudulent acts by players.

At least two or more gaming machines (e.g., pachinko machine 10) that are installed in the amusement arcade and are capable of executing a game by using a predetermined game medium (or game medium information, e.g., information on the number of balls or medals) by a player. )and,
member information storage means (e.g., member ID information 603a1) for storing member information for individually identifying players by being registered in advance; (or game value purchased by a player in a predetermined manner), etc., in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means (for example, retained gaming points). 603a3 and/or retained awarded points 603a4, or executed game points 603b2 and/or executed awarded points 603b3);
a photographing means (for example, a video camera 701) for photographing an image of the game machine;
A gaming system comprising terminal means (eg, terminal device PC) configured to communicate with the management device from outside the gaming hall via a predetermined transmission path (eg, Internet line),
The management device
video output means capable of outputting a game machine video of the gaming machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
a display means (for example, a monitor 900) capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means;
external execution information output means (for example, "fire button image") for outputting external execution information for executing a game in the gaming machine to the management device;
The management device
When the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means , execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information (for example, game execution instruction) for causing the gaming machine to execute a game,
The game machine is
game execution means (e.g., ball shooting) for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means;
In the game hall, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. a game is executed in a second gaming machine different from the first gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the individual gaming value storage means corresponding to the first member information in the terminal means. A gaming system I0 characterized by comprising terminal-side multiple game regulation means for regulating the.

According to the game system I0, at least two or more game machines installed in the game arcade are configured so that a game can be executed by a player using a predetermined game medium. In addition, in the management device, the member information storage means stores member information for individually identifying the players by being registered in advance, and the individual game value storage means stores the member information based on the game played on the gaming machine. Game value information such as the given game value is stored in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means. Further, the image of the game machine is captured by the image capturing means, and the terminal means is configured to be capable of communicating with the management device from outside the game arcade through a predetermined transmission path. Here, the image output means provided in the management device is configured to be capable of outputting the game machine image of the game machine photographed by the photographing means to the terminal means. In addition, the display means provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image output by the video output means, and the external execution information output means also provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image to the management apparatus. External execution information for executing a game is output. Then, when the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, the execution information output means provided in the management device stores it in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means. Based on the game value information received, game execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game can be output. Here, when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means, the game is executed using the game medium by the game execution means provided in the gaming machine. Then, in the game arcade, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. the terminal-side multiple-game regulation means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the first member information in the terminal means, the game on the second game machine different from the first game machine. execution is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent a single player from executing a so-called multi-player game between the game parlor and the terminal means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating by the player.

In the gaming system I0,
The individual game value storage means is
When a predetermined authentication process input by a player is executed, the game value information can be used,
Said terminal side multiple game regulation means,
In the game hall, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. A game system I1 characterized in that the authentication process is not executed in the terminal means when the authentication process is performed.

According to the game system I1, in addition to the effects of the game system I0, the following effects are produced. That is, when a predetermined authentication process input by the player is executed, the individual game value storage means enables use of the game value information. Then, in the game arcade, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. authentication processing is not executed in the terminal means by the terminal side multiple game regulation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a single player from executing a so-called multi-player game between the game parlor and the terminal means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating by the player.

In gaming system I0 or I1,
In the terminal means, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. a game is executed in a second gaming machine different from the first gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the individual gaming value storage means corresponding to the first member information in the gaming parlor. A game system I2 characterized by comprising a game hall side multiple game regulation means for regulating the.

According to the game system I2, in addition to the effects of the game system I0 or I1, the following effects are obtained. That is, in the terminal means, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. game hall side plural game regulation means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the first member information in the game hall, the game is played on the second game machine different from the first game machine. is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent a single player from executing a so-called multi-player game between the game parlor and the terminal means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating by the player.

In gaming system I2,
The individual game value storage means is
When a predetermined authentication process input by a player is executed, the game value information can be used,
Said amusement center side multiple game regulation means,
In the terminal means, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. A game system I3 characterized in that the authentication process is not executed in the game arcade if the authentication process has been completed.

According to the game system I3, in addition to the effects of the game system I2, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a predetermined authentication process input by the player is executed, the individual game value storage means enables use of the game value information. Then, in the terminal means, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. authentication processing is not executed in the game hall by the game hall side multiple game regulation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a single player from executing a so-called multi-player game between the game parlor and the terminal means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating by the player.

In any of the game systems I0 to I3,
The game machine is
execution result output means (e.g., output of execution result information) for outputting execution result information indicating that the game has been executed by the game execution means to the management device;
The management device
game value information decreasing means for decreasing (for example, subtracting 1) the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means; A game system I4 characterized by:

According to the game system I4, in addition to the effects of the game systems I0 to I3, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the execution information output means outputs the game execution information, the game execution means provided in the gaming machine executes a game using the game medium, and the execution result output means causes the game execution means to execute the game. is output to the management device. Then, when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is reduced by the game value information reduction means provided in the management device. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine by means of the terminal means.

In any of the game systems I0 to I4,
The game machine is
Provided game value information (e.g., game value data) indicating the provided game value when a predetermined provided game value is provided as a result of executing a game using the game medium based on the game execution information. , a given game value output means for outputting to the management device,
The management device
and game value increasing means for increasing the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the given game value information is output from the given game value output means. Game system I5.

According to the game system I5, in addition to the effects of the game systems I0 to I4, the following effects are obtained. That is, when a given game value is given as a result of executing a game using a game medium based on the game execution information by the given game value output means provided in the gaming machine, the given game value is output. The provided game value information shown is output to the management device. When the given game value information is output from the given game value output means by the game value increasing means provided in the management device, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is increased. As a result, while allowing the game to be played in the gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the management device, the game value information is increased when the given game value is given as a result of the execution of the game in the gaming machine. Since the game value information possessed by the player can be centrally managed in the management device, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring cheating.

In any of the game systems I0 to I5,
The management device
game value information output means for outputting the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
A game system I6 characterized by displaying the game value information on the display means when the game value information is output by the game value information output means.

According to the game system I6, in addition to the effects of the game systems I0 to I5, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is output to the terminal means by the game value information output means provided in the management device. Then, in the terminal means, when the game value information is output by the game value output means, the game value information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine while confirming the gaming value information owned by the player himself/herself on the terminal means, and by diversifying the place where the game is executed, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the convenience of

<J Group: Authenticating whether the authentication card is correct between the terminal device and the manufacturer server>
Conventionally, a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that is installed in a game hall (for example, a game hall) and performs a game by using a game medium (for example, a ball), and a game machine that a player plays There is a gaming system including a management device (for example, a hall computer) that individually accumulates and manages game results (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-138711)).

However, in the gaming system described above, it is necessary to suppress cheating by players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group J was made in view of the above-described circumstances, and aims to provide a game system capable of suppressing fraudulent behavior by players.

A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 10) installed in a game hall and capable of executing a game by using a predetermined game medium (or game medium information; for example, information on the number of balls or medals);
member information storage means (e.g., member ID information 603a1) for storing member information for individually identifying players by being registered in advance; (or game value purchased by a player in a predetermined manner), etc., in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means (for example, retained gaming points). 603a3 and/or retained awarded points 603a4, or executed game points 603b2 and/or executed awarded points 603b3);
a photographing means (for example, a video camera 701) for photographing an image of the game machine;
terminal means (eg, terminal device PC) configured to be able to communicate with the management device from outside the gaming arcade via a predetermined transmission path (eg, Internet line);
A gaming system comprising a discrimination device (for example, a data server of a gaming machine manufacturer A) configured to communicate with the terminal device via the transmission path,
The management device
video output means capable of outputting a game machine video of the gaming machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
a display means (for example, a monitor 900) capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means;
external execution information output means (for example, "fire button image") for outputting external execution information for executing a game in the gaming machine to the management device;
The management device
When the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means , execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information (for example, game execution instruction) for causing the gaming machine to execute a game,
The game machine is
game execution means (e.g., ball shooting) for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means;
execution result output means (for example, output of execution result information) for outputting execution result information indicating that a game has been executed by the game execution means to the management device;
Unique information storage means (eg, serial number storage unit 202j) for storing unique information (eg, serial number SN) uniquely assigned to the gaming machine by the discrimination device;
gaming machine side unique related output means for outputting unique information related information related to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means to the management device (for example, outputting data related to the serial number SN to the hall computer 600); , and
The management device
game value information reducing means for reducing (for example, subtracting 1) the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the execution result information is output from the execution result output means;
When the unique information related information is output from the gaming machine side unique related output means, the management side unique related output means (for example, to the terminal device PC) outputs the unique information related information to the terminal device. Send data about serial number SN),
The terminal device
When the unique information related information is output from the management side unique related output means, the terminal side unique related output means (for example, the data server of game machine maker A) outputs the unique information related information to the discrimination device. Send data about serial number SN to
The discriminating device is
When the unique information related information is output from the terminal side unique related output means, the discrimination means (for example, the terminal device) discriminates between the unique information assigned to the game machine and the unique information related information. (whether or not the data regarding the serial number SN transmitted from the PC matches the serial number SN assigned to the pachinko machine 10 by the data server);
determination result output means for outputting the determination result determined by the determination means to the terminal device (for example, transmitting data indicating match or mismatch of serial number SN to the terminal device PC); A gaming system J0 characterized by:

According to the game system J0, a game machine installed in a game arcade can execute a game by using a predetermined game medium. In addition, in the management device, the member information storage means stores member information for individually identifying the players by being registered in advance, and the individual game value storage means stores the member information based on the game played on the gaming machine. Game value information such as the given game value is stored in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means. Further, the image of the game machine is captured by the image capturing means, and the terminal means is configured to be capable of communicating with the management device from outside the game arcade through a predetermined transmission path. Further, the discriminating device enables communication with the terminal device via the transmission path. Here, the image output means provided in the management device is configured to be capable of outputting the game machine image of the game machine photographed by the photographing means to the terminal means. In addition, the display means provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image output by the video output means, and the external execution information output means also provided in the terminal means can display the game machine image to the management apparatus. External execution information for executing a game is output. Then, when the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, the execution information output means provided in the management device stores it in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means. Based on the game value information received, game execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game can be output. Here, when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means, the game is executed using the game medium by the game execution means provided in the gaming machine, and the execution result output means outputs the game execution means. Execution result information indicating that the game has been executed is output to the management device. Further, unique information uniquely assigned to the gaming machine by the determination device is stored in the unique information storage means, and unique information related information related to the unique information stored in the unique information storage means is stored in the unique information storage means by the gaming machine side unique related output means, Output to the management device. Then, when execution result information is output from the execution result output means, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is reduced by the game value information reduction means provided in the management device, and the game value information unique to the gaming machine is reduced. When the unique information related information is output from the related output means, the management side unique related output means outputs the unique information related information to the terminal device. Here, when the unique information related information is output by the management side unique related output means, the unique information related information is output to the determination device by the terminal side unique related output means provided in the terminal device. Then, when the unique information related information is output from the terminal side unique related output means, the unique information and the unique information related information assigned to the game machine by the discrimination device are discriminated by the discrimination means provided in the discrimination device, The determination result output means outputs the determination result determined by the determination means to the terminal device. As a result, in the terminal device, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine on which the game is played is to which the unique information has been officially assigned by the determination device, and it is possible to suppress the gaming on the unauthorized gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In the gaming system J0,
The terminal device
When receiving, as the determination result output by the determination result output means, that the unique information and the unique information-related information match, a regular display indicating that the gaming machine is legitimate is displayed. A gaming system J1 characterized by comprising an authorized display means (for example, a display indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is authorized and distributed by the gaming machine maker A).

According to the game system J1, in addition to the effects of the game system J0, the following effects are produced. That is, when receiving a determination result output by the determination result output means indicating that the unique information and the unique information-related information match, the official display means provided in the terminal device displays the information on the official gaming machine. A normal display is made to indicate that there is. As a result, the user can play the game with peace of mind after displaying on the terminal device that the gaming machine is legally assigned unique information by the discriminating device, thereby preventing cheating. There is an effect that the deterrent effect can be enhanced.

In the game system J0 or J1,
The terminal device
Non-legal display indicating that the gaming machine is non-legal when receiving as the discrimination result outputted by the discrimination result output means that the unique information and the unique information-related information are not matched. (for example, a display indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is not officially distributed by the game machine maker A).

According to the game system J2, in addition to the effects of the game system J0 or J1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when it receives a discrimination result output by the discrimination result output means indicating that the unique information and the unique information-related information are not matched, the illegal game is displayed by the illegal display means provided in the terminal device. Non-regular display is performed to indicate that it is a machine. As a result, by displaying on the terminal device that the gaming machine that plays the game is a gaming machine to which unique information has not been officially assigned by the discriminating device, it is possible to suppress games on unauthorized gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of deterring fraud can be enhanced.

In game systems J0 to J2,
The game machine is
Provided game value information (e.g., game value data) indicating the provided game value when a predetermined provided game value is provided as a result of executing a game using the game medium based on the game execution information. , a given game value output means for outputting to the management device,
The management device
game value increasing means for increasing the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means when the given game value information is output from the given game value output means;
When the unique information and the unique information-related information are not matched by the determining means, the imparted game value information imparted and stored in the individual information storage means in the gaming machine where the matching is not achieved. (for example, prohibiting the use of the awarded points acquired by the pachinko machine 10 whose production number SN does not match) for regulating the use of the game system J3.

According to the game system J3, in addition to the effects of the game systems J0 to J2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the gaming machine, as a result of executing a game using a game medium based on the game execution information, when a predetermined imparted game value is imparted, the imparted game value indicating the imparted game value is generated by the imparted game value output means. Value information is output to the management device. Then, in the management device, when the given game value information is output from the given game value output means, the game value information stored in the individual game value giving storage means is increased by the game value increasing means. Here, when the unique information and the unique information-related information are not matched by the determining means, the given game value is given by the use restricting means to the gaming machine which is not matched and stored in the individual information storage means. Use of information is regulated. As a result, it is possible to regulate the use of the imparted game value information acquired in the game on the game machine to which the unique information is not normally assigned by the discriminating device, and it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring cheating. .

In the gaming machine J3,
The use control means is
A gaming machine J4 characterized by comprising: other machine regulation means for regulating use in a gaming machine other than the gaming machine to which the imparted game value is imparted.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the use of the game machine other than the game machine to which the imparted game value is imparted is restricted by the other machine restriction means provided in the use restriction means. As a result, it is possible to promote a game in the gaming machine to which the given game value has been given, and it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine J3 or J4,
The use control means is
The gaming machine J5 is characterized by comprising non-continuity restricting means for restricting the use of the gaming machine to which the imparted game value has been imparted, except when the game is continuously played.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3 or J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discontinuation restriction means provided in the use restriction means restricts the use of the gaming machine except when the game is continuously played with the gaming machine to which the given game value is provided. As a result, it is possible to promote continued playing in the gaming machine to which the given game value has been provided, and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of the game systems J0 to J5,
The management device
game value information output means for outputting the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
A game system J6 characterized by displaying the game value information on the display means when the game value information is output by the game value information output means.

According to the game system J6, in addition to the effects of the game systems J0 to J5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means is output to the terminal means by the game value information output means provided in the management device. Then, in the terminal means, when the game value information is output by the game value output means, the game value information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine while confirming the gaming value information owned by the player himself/herself on the terminal means, and by diversifying the place where the game is executed, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the convenience of

For any one of the gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, the gaming machines or gaming systems B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, A configuration limited by any one of H0 to H7, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the gaming machines or gaming systems B0 to B8, the gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, A configuration limited to any one of H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the gaming machines or gaming systems C0 to C5, the gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, A configuration limited to any one of H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the gaming machines or gaming systems D0 to D6, the gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, A configuration limited to any one of H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the gaming machine or gaming system E0 to E8, the gaming machine or gaming system A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, A configuration limited to any one of H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

Further, for any one of the game machines or game systems F0 to F8, the game machines or game systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, G0 to G7, A configuration limited to any one of H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the gaming machines or gaming systems G0 to G7, the gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, A configuration limited to any one of H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

Further, for any one of the game machines or game systems H0 to H6, the game machines or game systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, A configuration limited by any one of G0 to G7, I0 to I6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the gaming machines or gaming systems I0 to I6, the gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, A configuration limited by any one of G0 to G7, H0 to H6, and J0 to J6 may be applied.

Further, for any one of the game machines or game systems J0 to J6, the game machines or game systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, A configuration limited by any one of G0 to G7, H0 to H6, and I0 to I6 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, A gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines or gaming systems A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C5, D0 to D6, E0 to E8, F0 to F8, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, The game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st starting port (part of game device)
65 variable winning device (part of game device)
110 main controller (part of main control means)
111 payout control device (part of sub-control means, part of first sub-control means, part of game value imparting means, part of payout control means)
113 Audio ramp controller (part of sub-control means, part of second sub-control means, part of sub-control means)
202i Serial number storage unit (part of unique information storage means)
300 encryption device (part of processing means, part of processing output means)
400 decoding device (a part of unique information determination means)
411 card insertion hole (part of distinguishable means)
500 authentication card (part of unique information determination means)
501 IC chip (part of correspondence information storage means)
501a Serial number storage (part of corresponding information)
501b Master key storage unit (part of correspondence information)
501c Expiration date information storage unit (part of validity setting means)
600 hall computer (part of management equipment)
603a2 Game history information (part of game history storage means)
603a1 Member information storage unit (part of member information storage means)
603a3 Retained gaming points (part of purchased gaming value storage means, part of individual gaming value storage means)
603a4 Retention Granted Points (Part of Granted Game Value Storage Means, Part of Individual Game Value Storage Means)
603b2 Execution game points (part of individual game value storage means)
603b3 Execution granted points (part of individual game value storage means)
701 video cameras (part of photography means)
900 monitor (part of display means)
PC terminal device (part of terminal means)
CC control command (part of control information)
SN Serial number (part of unique information)
S3002 Separation and decoding processing (part of correspondence determination means)
S3106-S3110 (part of restoration means)

Claims (1)

at least two or more game machines installed in a game hall and capable of executing a game by a player using a predetermined game medium;
Member information storage means for storing member information for individually identifying players by being registered in advance; a management device having individual game value storage means for storing in association with the member information stored in the member information storage means;
a photographing means for photographing an image of the game machine;
A gaming system comprising terminal means configured to be able to communicate with the management device from outside the gaming arcade via a predetermined transmission path,
The management device
video output means capable of outputting a game machine video of the gaming machine captured by the imaging means to the terminal means;
The terminal means are
a display means capable of displaying the game machine image output by the image output means;
external execution information output means for outputting external execution information for executing a game in the gaming machine to the management device;
The management device
When the external execution information is output from the external execution information output means, based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the member information stored in the member information storage means , execution information output means capable of outputting game execution information for causing the game machine to execute a game,
The game machine is
game execution means for executing a game using the game medium when the game execution information is output from the execution information output means;
In the game arcade, a game is played on a predetermined first gaming machine based on the game value information stored in the individual game value storage means corresponding to the predetermined first member information stored in the member information storage means. a game is executed in a second gaming machine different from the first gaming machine based on the gaming value information stored in the individual gaming value storage means corresponding to the first member information in the terminal means. A gaming system characterized by comprising terminal-side multiple game regulation means for regulating the.

Images